Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. schedules. click Training Files. 13 Click OK. the parameter is one of association or connection. You learn the terminology. and phases when you need it. the operation of the software is parametric. As you work in drawing and schedule views. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. quantities. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and click Open. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and customize the project as necessary. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. If the length of the elevation is changed. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. In this case. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. the floor or roof remains connected. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. hence. If you move the partition.rte. sections. you will use the default template. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. In the Revit Architecture model. construction. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the door retains this relationship to the partition. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. and plans. scope. 12 Select DefaultMetric. and schedules required for a building project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. For most tutorial projects. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and residential. In this case. how to navigate the user interface. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. review the Revit Architecture templates. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the hierarchy of elements. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and open Metric\Templates. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. every drawing sheet. 2D and 3D view. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawings. drawing sheets.

dimensions. doors. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. doors. For example. windows. For example. walls and roofs are hosts.When you change something. and 2D detail components. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. For example. and cabinets are model components. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. They display in relevant views of the model. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. They help to describe or document the model. dimensions. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. levels. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and roofs are model elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Understanding the Basics | 7 . tags. walls. and keynotes are annotation elements. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. programming is not required. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. windows. If you can draw. and reference planes are datum elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. filled regions. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. tags. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. grids. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Examples include detail lines.

or bottom of foundation. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. you must be in a section or elevation view. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. top of wall. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. and ceilings. and so forth). you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. To place levels. schedules. In other cases. you do nothing to establish these relationships. you can explicitly control them. By using a single project file. Most often. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. floors.In Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. for example. This information includes components used to design the model. and types. and drawings of the design. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. from geometry to construction data. The project file contains all information for the building design. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. However. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. for example. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. views of the project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. first floor. elevation views. such as roofs. section views. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. families. Often. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Project: In Revit Architecture.

such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. specifically its clear user interface. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. the user interface is labeled. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can also be a style. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. dimensions. In the steps that follow. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. roofs. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. and similar graphical representation. ceilings. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . identical use. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. In the following illustration. System families include walls. For example. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). making it easy to understand what each button represents. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. floors. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. categories of model elements include walls and beams. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families can be transferred between projects.

The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. This creates a new project based on the default template. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click (New). In addition.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. By default.

the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. While working in the drawing area. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . you type the required key combination to perform the command. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Edit. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. and View. For example. which are listed on the menu. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

9 In the Type Selector. When you select the Door tool. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. when you add a door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. For example. On the left side of the Options Bar. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.

■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. In the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Show Design Bars dialog displays. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the tab in the Design Bar.11 Click OK. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. In the Project Browser. select Views (all).

schedules. walls. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. and group name. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. sheets. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. reports. families.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 3D). families. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . The browser is dockable. windows). You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and rename views. delete. elevations. family category (doors. double-click its name. and groups. To open a view.

click Wall. The cursor displays as a pencil. In this case. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Cancel. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. After creating a browser organization scheme. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the bottom left corner of the window. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets.

In addition. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). There are several tools that help you find information. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. in conjunction with tooltips. After you are familiar with these tasks. If no Help button displays. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. 20 Press TAB. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. click Modify to end the Wall command. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . Tooltips: To see tooltips.18 On the Design Bar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. find a keyword on the Index tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. press F1 for help. The status bar also provides information. press F1 for context-sensitive help. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. In the status bar. regarding selected elements in a view. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. It highlights when the cursor is over it. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Click the Help button. Windows: From any window. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. You can also press SHIFT+F1. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. When you place the cursor over an element. click on the Standard toolbar. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. You can use this tri-pane.

The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. There are several ways to access zoom options. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. In the drawing area. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. the view zooms out from the building model. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu.

10 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 7 Click in the drawing area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. As you move the mouse. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. on the View toolbar. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . the view zooms in on the selected area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.

and select the wall. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click Help. expand Floor Plans. and click the SteeringWheels tab. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 15 To exit the wheel. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. and then using the Zoom tool again. press ESC. Small blue dots. called drag controls. When drawing or modifying a building model. moving the wheel to the desired location.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. Cnst. For more information about SteeringWheels. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Similar controls. display along the ends. These are the drag controls. 17 Type ZR. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . as shown. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. referred to as shape handles. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and double-click 2nd Flr. bottoms.

Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. to lengthen the wall. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. click to specify the starting position. Some commands. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. The table moves down. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. such as Move and Copy. and on the Tools toolbar.18 Click and drag the left control. In this case. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. as shown. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . click (Move). 23 Click next to the lower wall.

End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list. 26 On the Undo menu. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Some commands. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move. In this example. and click again to end it. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. click Lines. or press CTRL+Z. 24 Select the plant. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). click the Undo command. and drag it on top of the table. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . on the Standard toolbar. such as the Lines command.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line.

Press ESC twice. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. On the Design Bar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . 30 Close the file without saving your changes.29 To end the command. click Modify.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

illustrating how building components work together. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Use detail components to define an assembly. When you have finished these tutorials. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. but for training purposes. detail. or referenced as a drafting view. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In this tutorial. 27 . In Revit Architecture. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. and annotate building assemblies. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow.

click Drafting View. click Training Files. enter Window Head Detail. for Name. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. create a reference callout. and reference a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a drafting view.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. import a DWG detail. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. and click OK.rvt. If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . scroll until the folder is displayed. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. 3 In the Scale list.

displaying the extents of the detail. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. and click Open. 6 In the Colors field list. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The model zooms out.In the Project Browser. as shown. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. The drawing area is still blank.). 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. located directly to the left of the drawing area. 10 In the drawing area. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. click Training Files.dwg. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 9 Type ZR. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. select Black and White. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser.

and in the Scale list. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 In the drawing area. select Detail View: Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown.The view displays to the specified area. 13 Click Reference other view. click Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. in the Type Selector. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . to activate the view selection list.

3 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start.rvt. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.The reference callout is created. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click the reference callout tag head. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . select Callout. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. in the Type Selector. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. adjust the detail view display settings.

click Modify to clear the selection. under Detail Views (Detail). 4 Right-click Detail 0. under Detail Views(Detail). and click OK.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. double-click Wall Base 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 8 On the Design Bar. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter Wall Base 1. 6 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. for Name.

bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

14 In the drawing area. click (Hide Crop Region). 13 On the View Control Bar. for Display Model. select As Underlay. and click OK.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. and click View Properties. under Graphics. 16 Click OK. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. right-click. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components.

the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. type 1' 6''. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Brick on Mtl. Stud. click Detail Components. and press ENTER. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . Directly above the drawing area. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . typical details can easily be placed.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. If the crop region is enlarged. By grouping detail components. 19 In the Type Selector. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. 20 In the drawing area. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. on the Options Bar. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 17 On the View Control Bar. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”.

27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 23 Using the same method. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. add the following detail components as shown. as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to end the command. and click Create Instance. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 25 In the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail.22 Press ESC twice to end the command.

■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.28 Press ESC to end the command. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

in the type selector. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.txt. or instructions within a construction documentation package. For more information about customizing a keynote database. In the next exercise. click Training Files. and format keynote styles. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and under Keynote Table. special notes. and Free End are selected. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . map keynotes by material. c_express_workshop_details_start. for Full Path. Leader. 4 On the Options Bar. click Browse. You can customize this list. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. and verify that Horizontal. click Keynote ➤ Element.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element.rvt.

If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 8 Click to place the tag. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . Either move the text inside.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. If no value has been specified.5 In the drawing area. a question mark displays. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Keynoting | 39 .

You will now change all keynotes to keys only. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 15 Select 07 21 00.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 13 Click to place the tag. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 12 Click to place the leader arm. click Keynote ➤ Material. 16 In the drawing area. and click OK.

Creating Details with Revit Architecture. legends. Only the keynotes remain selected. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK. Select Keynote Tags. 17 On the Options Bar.Boxed. Click Check None. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. 19 In the Type Selector.All items within the selection display in red. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.

In this lesson. you will create a sheet. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. update the project information element properties. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Place views on drawing sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. Add labels to a title block. In this exercise.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets.

accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. scroll until the folder is displayed. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. If necessary. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. or in the element properties of the title block.rvt. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click OK. In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. click Training Files. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In Revit Architecture. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all).

For Name. under Sheets(all). enter A602.4 Type ZR. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. roll the wheel. right-click A602 . drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. hold down the wheel and drag. To pan. and click Rename. Then. In this tutorial. 6 In the Title Block. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets.Unnamed. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 5 In the drawing area. enter Sections/Details. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. Click OK. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 9 In the Project Browser. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 8 On the Design Bar. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. 7 Enter K. Smith and press ENTER. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. double-click Checker. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. click Modify to clear the selection. To zoom in and out.

20 Click and type Project Status. 15 In the Options Bar. enter 4/10/2008. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter Freighthouse Flats. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. Smith. 16 Type ZR. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click OK. For Project Status. 17 On the Design Bar. click Text. For Project Name. enter Design Development. (Left) is selected.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. For Client Name. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. The Family Editor opens. in the Type Selector. enter J. select the title block. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . 18 On the Options Bar. select Text : 1/8''.

26 In the Edit Label dialog. as shown. to add 28 Using the same method. select Label : 3/16''.21 On the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to exit the command. under Category Parameters. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. as shown. click Label. in the Type Selector. and verify that (Top) are selected. and click. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. and click OK. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 23 On the Design Bar. click (Load into Project). add Project Issue Date parameter.

select Override parameter values of existing types. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. In this exercise. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. click Training Files. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 .Project. and click Yes. place and modify a keynote legend. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.txt. for Full Path. a viewport displays. for Name. representing the view or schedule. Next you will create. enter Keynote Legend . The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.30 In the Reload Family dialog. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. you will create. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. and under Keynote Table. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. click Browse. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. to a drawing sheet.

TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. and drag Keynote Legend . The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. as shown. on the Appearance tab. expand Legends. 8 In the Project Browser.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . double-click A601 . and click OK. under Text. clear Show Headers.Sections/Details. under Sheets (all).

displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.Project as shown. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. The keynote legend is visible. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Detail Views (Detail). as shown. under Legends. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. 19 Click OK twice. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. at the bottom of the Filter tab. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. click Edit. The Keynote Legend is now blank.Sheet. not keynotes. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. enter Keynote Legend . select Filter by sheet. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. and click OK. for View Name. right-click Keynote Legend . and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. for Filter.Project. and click Properties.

Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The view remains selected. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser.The keynote legend is automatically updated. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. The view title with line displays below the viewport. and then add and update a Drawing list. as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). double-click A0 .Title Sheet 1.

Press ESC to clear the selection. by default. define the information to include in a view title. Revit Architecture displays a view title. or omit view titles from sheets. The drawing list remains selected. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. as shown. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list.When you place a view on a sheet. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can specify text attributes for view titles. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. As part of a construction document set. 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Type ZR. 3 In the Type Selector. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and zoom in on the drawing list. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection.

under Identity Data. right-click the selected sheets. clear Appears In Drawing List. select A602 . NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. while pressing SHIFT. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Ceiling Plans.Sections/Details and select A801 . The drawing list display is updated.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click OK. including only sheets that contain views.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

the wall or column will move with it. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. For example. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. As you develop the building design. a central service core. If the grid moves. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. 57 . or “flex the model” by changing parameters.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. it is good practice to test the constraints. a curtain wall. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. After the beginning exercises.

The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. with an RVT extension. In views that display elevation markers. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. from the product library. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. and customize the project as necessary. you will use the default template. 5 Click OK. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. you load any required family type that is not in your project. To create the project file. 3 Under Template file. views. under Projects. construction. click New. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. 2 In the New Project dialog. The new project opens. Creating the Project In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Training Files. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. levels. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. The project is stored as a single file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. In practice. select Project. notice four elevation markers.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. and settings. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . For this project. locate the Project Browser. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. verify that the second option is selected. and residential. West. you design inside the elevation markers. East. but contains no geometry. In the drawing area in the right pane. South. you use a template that is provided with the software.rte. such as a door or window. under Create new. and click Browse.

schedules. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Two level lines.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. NOTE If you create a project without a template. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 10 In the Project Browser. and families in your project. as well as change their names. duplicate them. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. These views are customizable: you can rename them. Schedules/Quantities. created by the template.rvt) is selected. reflected ceiling plan views. notice the Legends. and click Training Files. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Ceiling Plans. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click South. heights. and elevation views created in the project by the template. delete. Groups. verify that Project Files (*. change their properties.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. will be accessible from the Project Browser. Families. Creating the Project | 59 . Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. then expand Floor Plans. 13 In the file window. Sheets (all). and duplicate levels. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. 14 For File name. you will want to save your work frequently. content and building model reports. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). and other properties. expand Views (all). As you design and document your building model. 8 Under Floor Plans. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 15 For Save as type. display in the south elevation. the view you see in the drawing area. and on the General tab. sheets. 7 If necessary. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 16 Click Save. and delete them. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. enter Revit Retail Building. You can add. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. view the Save reminder interval. double-click Metric. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. such as schedules and legends.

and double-click South. doors. or constrained. enter 00 Foundation. the other levels move and change with it. You learn how the levels are locked. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. After you modify the two default levels. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. and windows within the building model. so that when one level moves. You change the names of the 2 default levels. When you begin designing. and press ENTER. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. expand Views (all). it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .17 Proceed to the next exercise. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. to each other. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels on page 60.

Next. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 01 Entry Level. not all the tabs are visible. By default. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. which should display by default. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 14 Click Plan View Types. When you add the new level. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. and press ENTER. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. As you move the cursor. and click OK. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 16 Enter 3750. enter -1800. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. and click Basics. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. view the Design Bar. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. and press ENTER. right-click. If it does not. and then move it up. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. This is the Options Bar. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. click Level. enter 0. and press ESC. and press ENTER. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height.

or on the Design Bar. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn.18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 In the Project Browser. 25 Click to place the level line. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Level. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. If you create a level by copying it. using a different option. click (Pick Lines). 26 Press ESC. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. and for Offset. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. right-click Level 3. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 19 Click OK. and move it slightly upward. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 23 On the Options Bar. and enter 02 Level. click Modify to end the command. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. click Rename. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. you add another level. enter 3750. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Next. and rename the corresponding views.

Adding Project Levels | 63 . Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. as shown. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock. and you can move them independently.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. the levels are no longer constrained. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. all the levels move. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Notice that by moving the top level. Creating a Column Grid on page 64.

you constrain the column heights to the roof level. click Modify. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. specify a start point for the grid line. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. When the grid is complete. select (Draw). you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. so that if the roof elevation changes. In a later exercise. In the following exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. On the Design Bar. click Grid. Move the cursor up. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. the column height changes as well. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify the grid line endpoint. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.

■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 4500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. enter 7500 mm. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . click (Pick Lines). and for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and press ENTER. and click to place the line. click Grid. for Offset. for Offset. Enter A. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. Click to place the grid line. On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. Next. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B.

Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.8 Press ESC. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Options Bar. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. as shown. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid.

20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 21 Press ESC twice.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 15 Starting with grid line A. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 14 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 22 While pressing CTRL. click Dimension. select grid lines C and 3. click (Aligned).

click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line 5. Two pins display on the grid lines. click and drag the blue circular grip up. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. click the value for Center Segment. (Element Properties). and press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Modify. and select grid line A. enter 6. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 26 In the drawing area. click . 33 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. and select None. and click OK. 31 For End Segments Length. 24 Press ESC. The pins are hidden. click Duplicate. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .5mm Bubble with Gap. 29 In the Name dialog. until it is closer to grid line A. At the left endpoint of the grid line. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. select grid line 5. By pinning these central grid lines. click Modify. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 32 Click OK twice. and press ESC. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and on the Options Bar. If necessary. click Edit/New. enter 50mm.

select all of the grid lines. 37 Select the grid lines again.5mm Bubble. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. and press ESC. 35 In the Type Selector. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 36 On the Design Bar. click (Grid Intersection). 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and on the Options Bar. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. 39 In the Type Selector.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. For Place By. and in the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. select Grid : 6.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click Structural Column. The original continuous grid lines are restored. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).

46 On the Options Bar. and unlock it. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. If it is unlocked. click Activate Dimensions. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. select grid line A. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 52 On the Options Bar. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. select 01 Entry Level. for From. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and press ENTER. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 43 Press ESC. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. under Floor Plans. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. lock it. double-click 01 Entry Level. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 45 While pressing CTRL. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Next. 47 Enter 9000. click Camera.

Creating a Column Grid | 71 . and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

and click OK. 57 Proceed to the next exercise.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. displays in bold under 3D Views. The current view. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). Right-click 3D View 1. Adding Beams In this exercise. In the Rename View dialog. enter To Building. and click Rename. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. When you finish adding beams. expand 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. Adding Beams on page 72.

view the icons on the View Control Bar. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. The view is currently set to Coarse. select each grid line. under 3D Views. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Medium. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 6 In the Type Selector. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 73 . 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click (Create Beam On Grid). click Finish. The selected grid lines display as red. click Beam. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . under Floor Plans. 9 On the Options Bar. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 8 While pressing CTRL. the icon on the right side of the scale. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level.

select 02 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press and hold SHIFT. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click (Default 3D View). and click Select All Instances. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View toolbar. select 06 Roof. right-click. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Select one of the beams. click Modify. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar.

Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. right-click. resize the view to see the entire structure. click 24 Press ESC. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 25 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. and click OK. 20 Click Cancel. and click Element Properties. 06 Roof. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. (Element Properties). for Top Level. When you created the columns. Adding Beams | 75 . 21 With the column selected. and click Select All Instances. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. and if necessary. 22 On the Options Bar. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden.to the 5th level. view the Top Level parameter. All of the columns display as red. under Constraints. select 06 Roof. right-click. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. under Instance Parameters. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. but you want to display them in less detail. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 Save the drawing. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. double-click South.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. under Elevations. as lines only. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area.

double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces on page 77. and press ESC to end the command. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Framing Elevation.29 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 77 . Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you create 8 framing elevation views. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces In this exercise. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 3 On the Options Bar. To better add the braces to the structure.

After you add the final brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 8 In the Type Selector. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. but when placed the braces are placed. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. click to specify the start point of the brace. 7 On the Design Bar. 11 Using the same technique. The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. double-click the elevation marker arrow. click Brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. press ESC twice.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. and press ENTER. enter 18000 mm. delete it and redraw it. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 79 . Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.

13 Double-click the 04 Level height. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. but this time add them from right to left. enter 10000 mm. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and press ENTER. enter 12000 mm. and on the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. 21 Select grid line A. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Adding Braces | 81 . click Activate Dimensions. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. NOTE As you add braces. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 23 In the Project Browser. as shown in the 3D view below. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. under Floor Plans.

28 On the Standard toolbar. under 3D Views. double-click South. and if necessary. under Elevations. double-click 00 Foundation. 26 In the Project Browser. lock it. Creating a Foundation on page 82. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. 31 Save the drawing. Test connectivity of the columns. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. beams. click and roof height. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. grid size. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.24 In the Project Browser. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. and drag it away from the structure.

The foundation pile cap now displays. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and how to load specific families into a project. The pile cap has been added in the view. expand Families. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. select Unlimited. for View Range. In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Close the warning dialog. After you load the pile cap family. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. under Floor Plans. click Edit. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid.rfa. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. for Level. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. and expand Structural Foundations. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. In the View Range dialog. click Training Files. under Extents. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. A warning displays. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Foundation | 83 . and drag it to the drawing area. and press ESC twice. double-click 00 Foundation. under View Depth. and click View Properties. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1.Before you can add the pile caps.

When the final pile cap is placed. under 3D Views. press ESC twice. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. beam. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. You load new column. and click Select All Instances. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. and brace families into the project.rvt. and braces that you used to create the building structure. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. 2 Select one of the columns. you change the types of the columns. beams. click Training Files. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. All columns in the building model display as red.

click Duplicate. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. In the following steps. select the braces in the elevation one by one. under Dimensions. and click Select All Instances. the braces as well as the beams change. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Edit/New. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.3 In the Type Selector. enter 75mm. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 13 In the Name dialog. The building model displays the round hollow columns. click Modify. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for d. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203.9. click Brace.6X15. 7 On the Design Bar. 17 While pressing CTRL. click (Default 3D View).2X101. 9 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and changing its size parameter. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click Elevation 1-a. right-click. 6 In the Type Selector. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . This not the size that you want to use. click Modify. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. enter 75mm. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 4 On the Design Bar. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. you change the brace type. for Type. and click OK twice. The brace type changes.5CHS.

Origin to Origin. and click Open. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.rvt. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. select m_RRB_structure_complete. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After the files are linked.rvt. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . select Auto . Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. 3 Under Positioning.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.

88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 5 On the Tools toolbar. Grids. click (Copy/Monitor). and click Select Link. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the drawing area. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. while pressing CTRL. depending on the project. structural members.4 In the Project Browser. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. select the linked Revit model. In this case. and walls could also be copy/monitored. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 8 On the Options Bar. After the link is established. select Multiple. under Elevations. click Copy. double-click South. however. 9 In the drawing area. select Levels 00 through 06.

Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Click OK. for Floor Plan views. click Finish mode. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. click OK. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. delete the Level 2 floor plan. First.10 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 1. 18 Using the same method. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. under Floor Plans. while pressing SHIFT. and click Delete. 15 In the New Plan dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish. Linking the Structural Model | 89 .

right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. and click OK. 25 In the View Templates dialog. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. right-click. enter Floor Plans. click OK. 20 In the drawing area. 24 In the New View Template dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for Name. select the Topography : Surface.19 In the Project Browser. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

double-click Site. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. under Names.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. click Camera. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. and click OK. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . select Floor Plans. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. under Floor Plans.

stairs. 36 In the Rename View dialog. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. and click Rename. Adding Floors In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.35 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. right-click 3D View 1. and railings are also created from sketches. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Some other Revit Architecture elements. Adding Floors on page 92. expand 3D Views. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. such as roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.rvt. enter To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. In this exercise. To create floors. and click OK.

Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. At the top left corner of the grid. Leave this dimension unlocked. click (Rectangle). sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. If the grid changes size. under Floor Plans. and then the first horizontal grid line. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. double-click 01 Entry Level. Do not lock the dimension. past the first vertical grid line. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. select the top floor line. On the Options Bar. Adding Floors | 93 . 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. On the Sketch tab. You are now in the Sketch Editor. Move the cursor to the left. click Lines. click Dimension. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click Floor. and elements in the current view display as gray. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps.

Enter 300. select the top floor line. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. and click the temporary dimension value. At the top left corner of the grid. click Modify. press ENTER. They display on the floor sketch. and change their values to 300 mm. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Do not lock the dimensions. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select and lock the dimensions.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and then press ESC.

On the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 95 . double-click 02 Level.8 Select the floor. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and lock the dimensions. click Edit. click (Pick Lines). On the Options Bar. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. enter 1500mm. and press ESC. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. click Floor. and for Offset. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Next. Select the three remaining floor lines. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. on the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. using a different sketching technique. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. click Quit Sketch.

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. double-click 03 Level. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. The 02 Level floor displays. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click Floor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click (Align). click Lines. 17 On the Sketch tab. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 14 On the Design Bar. and a lock icon displays. click (Rectangle). and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

30 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. under Floor Plans. and lock the edges. and on the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Finish Sketch. Alternatively. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click {3D}.24 On the Design Bar. select 05 Roof Garden. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 35 On the Sketch tab. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 32 Select the floor. Adding Floors | 97 . click Finish Sketch. 31 In the Project Browser. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and click OK. under Views ➤ 3D Views. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Edit. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level.

Click (Pick Lines). Adding a Roof on page 98. enter 1800 mm. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER.rvt. click to place the roof line. When a blue dashed line displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Adding a Roof In this exercise. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. double-click 06 Roof. click Lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. ■ ■ For Offset. click Training Files. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. To create the roof. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E.

for Offset. click to place the roof line. and when the blue dashed line displays.6 Select grid line 5. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). 7 On the Options Bar. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. enter 300 mm. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). Adding a Roof | 99 .

Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. select the roof. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).10 Press ESC. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Roof. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. ■ 12 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Elevation. and click to specify the section. click Section. 17 On the Design Bar.14 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. Adding a Roof | 101 . The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. on grid D. 15 On the Options Bar. move the cursor down below the roof. enter -100 mm.

click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Construction.20 On the Design Bar. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. click Edit/New. select Variable. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). select the roof. 30 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. (Element Properties). double-click 06 Roof. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. In section. click Modify. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. under Floor Plans. for Structure [1]. 24 In the Project Browser. for Structure. and on the Options Bar. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped.

the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Adding a Roof | 103 . zoom in to the roof. click Modify.Roof Edge. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes.31 On the Design Bar. on the View Control Bar. click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. In this case. select Fascia : Fascia . 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select each edge. 41 Starting with the left front edge. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 40 In the Type Selector. select the section line. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 38 In the 3D view. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 37 If necessary. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click (Default 3D View). 33 In the warning dialog. and press DELETE. moving counter-clockwise.

View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. so if you resize the grid.42 On the Design Bar. the curtain wall resizes with it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. click Modify. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. you add a curtain wall. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

6 In the Name dialog. enter 600 mm. click Edit/New. for Join Condition. click to place the first curtain wall segment. Click OK twice. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). for Spacing. enter 1050 mm. for Spacing. for Type. select 05 Roof Garden. select 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Height. click 01 Entry Level. For Offset. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. and move it slightly toward the building interior. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. click Duplicate. For Level. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 3 In the Type Selector. enter 2100 mm. The type is saved in the project. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. and click OK.rvt. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Construction. enter Retail Storefront.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you duplicate a type. click Training Files. Under Vertical Grid Pattern.

under 3D Views. If you want to hide them. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. and trim each curtain wall segment. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. double-click To Building. 13 On the Design Bar. These dimensions are not in a sketch. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimensions. 15 On the View Control Bar.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. click (Trim/Extend). If the grid moves. so they remain in the view. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. click Dimension. you can delete the dimensions.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance | 107 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating an Entrance on page 107.rvt. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.

under Views (all). Do not select Columns. 7 Click OK. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 Under Visibility. and click None. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 6 Under Visibility. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. under the element list. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click All. and double-click South.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. clear one element to clear all the elements. All the elements in the list are selected. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 2 On the View Control Bar. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 4 On the Model Categories tab.

The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. double-click {3D}. press and hold CTRL. 12 With the panels selected. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 10 Select 1 panel. in this case an architectural elevation. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select Architectural Elevation. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. in the Type Selector. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. under 3D Views. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. select System Panel : Solid. 18 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.9 On the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

under 3D Views. double-click South. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. double-click To Building.

26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click to select it. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. select One Segment. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. click Add or Remove Segments.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 32 In the Type Selector. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. and unpin it. select another mullion to the right. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar.

press TAB until it is selected. and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Default 3D View).33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and view the new entrance. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 34 On the View toolbar. select it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.

remove the mullions from the 2nd. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise.38 Press DELETE. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and 4th panels. open the North elevation. 40 Optionally. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 39 Using the same process.

under Floor Plans. for Underlay. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. and click View Properties. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 02 Level. under Graphics. 3 Right-click in the view.

8 Select the callout. click Callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click Rename. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. enter Display Area. and click OK. select the grip closest to the callout head. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 .Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to complete the callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. under Floor Plans.

Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 13 Select the section line. and click Flip Section. click Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. right-click. 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. 12 Draw a section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

under Floor Plans. Click (Rectangle). and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 24 On the Tools toolbar. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. Lock both alignments. 21 In the Type Selector. click Wall. expand Sections (Building Section). For Loc Line. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. select Finish Face: Exterior. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 27 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Interior .17 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. enter Section Display Area. click Dimension. 25 Press ESC twice. select Wall faces. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Align). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click Rename.135mm Partition (2-hr). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. for Prefer.

and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the dimension. 37 In the Project Browser. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. Next. double-click Section Display Area.) 36 Press ESC twice. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 38 On the View Control Bar. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Ceiling Plans. under Sections (Building Section). 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. click Ceiling. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid.

42 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2700 mm. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. click to select it. under Ceiling Plans. and click to select the walls. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. press TAB until you select the wall chain. double-click Section Display Area. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Attach. enter 2700 mm. under Constraints. Select the 02 Level Floor. for Top/Base. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 46 Press ESC. On the Options Bar. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. for Height Offset From Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . click Modify. and click to select the walls. for Base Offset. 43 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. under Constraints. under Sections.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. click (Element Properties). and press ESC.

and click . Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 56 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structure. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. under Ceiling Plans. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Rotate). view the ceiling structure.49 In the Project Browser. click Cancel. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. click Edit/New. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 58 On the Edit toolbar. click Cancel. 54 Click OK. for Type.

enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 61 Press ESC.60 Click.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows Off. click Shadows On. 66 Optionally. 64 On the View Control Bar. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. double-click To Building. 65 On the View Control Bar. 67 Proceed to the next exercise.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. enter 1500 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. and for Offset. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . and click to create a reference plane to the left. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Move the cursor over grid line B. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to create a reference plane to the right. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and copy it to the 05 Level.rvt. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. click Training Files. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines).

click Stairs. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. C. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. shorten the right reference plane. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B.5 On the Design Bar. 2. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 6 Select the left reference plane. click Modify. and 3. 7 Using the same method.

click Wall. including its handrails. beyond the end of the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . and specify a point.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Move the cursor down. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. The complete stair displays. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector.225mm Masonry. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. select Finish Face: Interior. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. and select the 2nd reference plane. select Basic Wall : Generic .

Click Modify. and lock the alignment. for Prefer. select the dimension value. Lock the dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the wall. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 18 Using the same technique. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair.15 On the Tools toolbar. click Align. Select the interior face of the wall. enter 1200 mm. and click to select it. click Dimension. and specify a point away from the wall. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. select Wall faces. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Select the bottom of the stair.

29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. clear Tag on Placement. 25 While pressing CTRL. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . select both reference planes. The stair and walls move to the left. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension.21 Select the dimension. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. a warning displays. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 27 In the Type Selector. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. Because the dimension is constrained. TIP To flip the door swing. and press DELETE. 24 On the Standard toolbar. 28 On the Options Bar. click Door. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. (Undo). 23 Select the stair. and press DELETE.

select 05 Roof Garden. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw).30 On the Design Bar. select 00 Foundation. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click Modify. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. Click OK. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the View toolbar. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. click Align. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. under Floor Plans. Click OK. but if you view the top level of the building. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. for Multistory Top Level. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . For Top Constraint. 33 Select the stair. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. (Element Properties). (Rectangle). verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. select all 4 walls. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. double-click 01 Entry Level. Under Constraints. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. and move the cursor to spin the building model. (Default 3D View). You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for Base Constraint. 44 On the Tools toolbar. (SteeringWheels). Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. click 36 On the View toolbar.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. on the View toolbar. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and click OK. click see the roof. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and lock the alignments. and lock the alignment. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click (Default 3D View). 52 In the Select Levels dialog. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. (SteeringWheels).

(SteeringWheels). you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . By offsetting the base. For Top Constraint. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. for Base Offset. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise.55 In the Project Browser. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. click 59 On the View toolbar. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). Under Constraints. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. enter 300 mm. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 56 Select the shaft.

select 06 Roof.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . and click View Properties. under Graphics. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 2 Right-click in the view. for Underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Wall.

8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and on the Options Bar. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. and click Open View. select Basic Wall : Generic . 11 In the Go To View dialog. and press ENTER. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click .225mm Masonry. The exact placement is not important. click Lines. enter 9750. 17 On the Options Bar. and then select the right face of the wall. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. and click (Fillet arc). 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. click Remove Constraints. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. select Elevation: South. 15 In the error dialog. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 On the Design Bar. click (Align).5 In the Type Selector. click Edit Profile.

double-click {3D}. click . select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. under 3D Views.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. and click (Circle). 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Finish Sketch. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. 22 In the Project Browser. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar.

and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.

4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 5 On the Basics tab. select M_RPC Tree . 6 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans.4. click Training Files.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. and press ESC twice. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. between grid lines C and D.5 Meters. click Component. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Component. as shown.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . TIP After you place the 1st planter. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . select Planter : 1220 x 1220.

9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. enter 2400 mm. double-click {3D}. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 Select one of the trees. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof.5 Meters. click Edit/New. and then click OK twice. under Floor Plans. View the roof. double-click 05 Roof Garden. enter 1500 mm.5 Meters. and on the Options Bar. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click (Default 3D View). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.8 On the View toolbar. enter Japanese Cherry 1. under 3D Views. for Type. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. and in the Type Selector. select the 2 remaining trees. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click Apply. under Dimensions. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Duplicate. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. for Height. 14 In the Name dialog. 17 While pressing CTRL. click Floor. as shown. For Offset. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). (Element Properties). select M_RPC Tree .

enter 0 mm. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to place the line. for Offset. 25 Using the same method. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 29 On the Options Bar. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. click (Draw). Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 .23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line.

and click to finish the line. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 900 mm. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . clear Chain. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 35 Select the line that you just drew. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. click (Trim/Extend). 32 Press ESC.30 On the Options Bar.

47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Male : Alex.38 On the Design Bar. for Type. Next. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. select Rotate after placement. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. click Component. In plan view. and click so he is facing the column. near Column E5. under Constraints. 45 Click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. a photorealistic image displays. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . click Finish Sketch. 48 In the Type Selector. 43 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 49 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. for Height Offset from Level. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. as shown: (Element Properties). The completed sidewalk displays. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Select the sidewalk. When you render an image. enter Sidewalk. enter -250 mm. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. and on the Options Bar. 42 In the Name dialog.

and click to place her on the sidewalk. and click (Element Properties). and place it along the sidewalk behind him. click the car. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. click Camera. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 56 Press ESC twice. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Beetle. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE If necessary. 54 In the Type Selector. about 30 degrees. 52 In the Type Selector. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement.

pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and click OK. under Elevations. double-click West. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. Next. 66 Using the same method. enter -300 mm. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. under Constraints.59 In the Element Properties dialog. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. double-click To Building. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . 60 In the Project Browser. 64 Select Alex. 65 Click the sidewalk. click Pick Host. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. for Offset. click Pick Host. If the sidewalk changes height. under 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. When you select a host for a component. and on the Options Bar. 63 Click the sidewalk.

After the service core is positioned. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and replace them with a service core. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.

click (Default 3D View). click Training Files. under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. walls. including the stairs. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. double-click 05 Roof Garden. you delete the entire stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 5 On the View toolbar.rvt. (SteeringWheels). and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. click 6 On the View toolbar. and shaft opening. 4 Press DELETE. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . 3 Select the entire stairwell.

8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. click OK. under Floor Plans. click (Align). 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and zoom in to the linked instance. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. click Training Files. right-click m_RRB_core.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. double-click 00 Foundation. expand Groups. and click Create Instance. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. expand Model. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar.rvt. click Modify. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. 14 In the Project Browser. and notice that the linked file is listed. and on the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser.

and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. ■ ■ Click grid line C. 17 On the Design Bar. and click to align the center. 19 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). click (top down view). click Modify. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. click 21 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . 18 Select the core.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click Modify. (Default 3D View). Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. or if the group layout is expected to change. click Ungroup.

you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add glass railings around the floor edges. where it is hosted within a railing family. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. After you modify it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.

This is the railing that you want to add to your model. and select Glass. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. The rendering displays. double-click 02 Level. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 5 Expand Railing. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . click (Split).Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Renderings. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rvt. click OK. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click Edit. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. expand Families. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. press and hold CTRL. 3 In the Conference project. and on the Options Bar. and Parapet. 8 In the Project Browser. Handrail only.rvt. and expand Railings. and open Metric\m_Conference. in the Project Browser. and click to split the floor. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. The floor sketch displays. and double-click Lounge Perspective.

23 Complete the sketch as shown. and click to draw another line.15 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Lines. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to draw another line. click (Align). 25 Select grid line B. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. click Modify. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to place it. 24 On the Tools toolbar. verify that Chain is not selected. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.

34 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 30 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Railing. 29 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click (Align). enter 100 mm. for Type. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. and click the lock to lock the alignment.26 Select grid line D. click Railing Properties.rvt project. and lock the alignment. select Glass. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Dimension. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. Lock the dimensions. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown.

39 Click Finish Sketch.37 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Camera. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

lofty ceilings. balconies. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. exterior fire stairs.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. and a roof garden. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. 153 . As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. NOTE For training purposes. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009.

154 .

you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. elevation. how to create section and elevation views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. including plan. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. 155 . You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Level 2. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 .

13 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 11 Under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click 1: 1000. Next. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Rename View dialog. click the current scale. 14 On the View Control Bar. enter Vicinity Plan. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 .rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Elevation: Building Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Elevation. 4 On the Options Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select 1:100. under Floor Plans. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. for Scale. double-click Level 1. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.

■ Move the cursor down. for Scale. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Floor Plans. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. enter South East. 14 In the Type Selector. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. select 1:100. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. 11 In the Project Browser. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Elevations. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. select Section: Building Section. and click OK. under Views (all). click Section.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

Click the midpoint of the section line. click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. using the blue circular drag grip. click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. and double-click Section 1. expand Sections (Building Section). 24 Select gridline F. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 23 On the View Control Bar.21 On the Design Bar.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To create each view. click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Resulting callout view . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1:50. select Floor Plan. 3 In the Type Selector. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 . double-click Level 1. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Callout. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. for Scale.

and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. ■ Select the middle grip. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify.

13 In the Type Selector. under Sections (Building Sections). The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. and click OK. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Detail View: Detail. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. click Callout. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. for Scale. click Modify. double-click Section 1. select 1:50. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

17 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . and click OK. expand Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. under Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

rfa. double-click Level 1. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Section Head. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You change the appearance of the section mark head. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. click Training Files. the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. and click Open. under Floor Plans. open Metric\Families\Annotations.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

and click OK twice. Section Tail . 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Duplicate. click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog. 15 Under Category. and select 2. for Section Head. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Section Head . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog.5mm Square. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. .The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 4 On the Design Bar. 10 On the floor plan. 12 For Section Tag. scroll to Section Marks. and click OK. Section Tail – Filled. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags.Custom. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. On the floor plan. clear any others. 17 Under Category. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. click Edit/New. 22 In the Name dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click Load into Project. select the current project. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . scroll to Section Line. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and can be applied to the section line. enter 12. and click OK. select the section line. and click OK. and click OK. and select 3.Filled. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.

click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. and click OK. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select Custom-Callout Head. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.23 In the Type Properties dialog. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. open Metric\Families\Annotations. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select 12. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Duplicate. enter 6 mm. select Square. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. enter 12. 39 Click OK twice. Click OK.5mm Square. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. . select the current project. and on the Options Bar. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. select 3. For Dimensions ➤ Width. . click Edit/New. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the floor plan.rfa. notice the square elevation markers that display. 40 Press ESC. 27 Click OK twice. click Training Files. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. select the callout. 34 In the Name dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear all others. Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 36 In the drawing. for Elevation Tag. For Line Weight. for Callout Tag.5 mm. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. For Corner Radius. click Load into Project.

and select 4. and select 7. expand Callout Boundary. 43 Under Category. select Dash. 45 For Line Pattern. view regions. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. filters. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 46 Under Category.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 49 Click OK. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. You learn to create view templates. and visual overrides. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . scroll down to Callout Boundary. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click the Annotation Objects tab. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. masking regions.

and double-click East.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 5 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the View Toolbar. click (Show Crop Region). 2 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. To accomplish this. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click Training Files. The crop region displays as red. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.Creating a View Template In this exercise. click Zoom to Fit. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click (Hide Crop Region). 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

11 Under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. grids. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a View Template | 177 . clear Entourage. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. elevation markers. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and section lines are now hidden in the view. under Visibility. levels. Callouts. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On.

18 In the Project Browser. double-click North. right-click East. under Elevations. 17 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 20 Using the same method. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. edit the crop region as before. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Elevations. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click North. 16 In the View Templates dialog. and click Create View Template From View. click Apply. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 15 In the New View Template dialog. click OK.rvt.

under Extents. right-click.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Under View Depth. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Click OK twice. click Edit. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for Bottom. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). select Level Below (Level 4). and click Properties. for View Range. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. for Level. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . 2 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Penthouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.

Click OK twice. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. for Level. right-click. select Level 4. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Roof Plan. select Roof Plan. select Level 4. under Extents. and click Properties.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. for View Range. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Edit.

select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Plan Region. In the left corner of the building. under Extents. for Bottom. Under View Depth. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Edit. 11 On the Options Bar. for Level. Move you cursor diagonally. click Finish Sketch.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click Region Properties. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Unlimited. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . select Unlimited. Click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. for View Range. 10 On the Design Bar.

the fire rating of the walls.17 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Views (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and double-click Level 1. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. click the Filters tab. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. After you apply the filter. click Modify. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Floor Plans. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. in this case.

11 Select Rated Walls. under Filters. 10 On the Filter tab. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. under Projection/Surface. click Override under Patterns. enter Rated Walls.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Color dialog. select Walls. Select contains. Enter Hr. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. and apply a color. 9 Click OK. click <No Override>. 12 On the Filter tab. select Fire Rating. 17 Using the same method. and click OK. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Basic colors. 16 Click OK. select Solid Fill. select the red color. for Pattern. and click OK. for Rated Walls. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click (New). click Edit/New. 7 In the Filters dialog. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click Add. 5 In the Filters dialog. click Remove. under Categories. click OK. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. for Color. and click OK. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog.

Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you obscure geometry in portions of a view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Rename. 4 On the View Control Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 7 On the View menu. select Invisible lines. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 8 Select the crop region. click Masking Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click OK. 11 In the Type Selector. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 5 On the View menu. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click. as shown. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.

13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 14 On the Design Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch.

enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click 1: 50. under Pattern Overrides. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click the current scale. right-click. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. click in the Patterns field. 11 Click OK twice. select Solid fill. click black. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Rename. select Walls. under Floor Plans. right-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. for Pattern. and click OK. 7 Under Cut.rvt. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . and click Override. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. for Color. click <No Override> to apply a color. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click OK. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click.

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors. and click OK.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. clear Grids. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click.

Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan.20 Right-click. By using the previous method to make the selection. and click OK. under Lines. right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 21 Under Projection/Surface. select the sofa. select Dash. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. for Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click Projection Lines. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 25 Click OK twice. 23 In the Color dialog. click Override. click a purple color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog.

Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 30 On the Design Bar.28 For Color. select a bright green color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 29 In the Color dialog. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click By Category Override. click Modify. right-click. 32 Select one of the lamps. and click OK twice.

how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.33 On the View Control Bar. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project.

and click View. click Training Files. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. select A0 metric. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Creating Sheets. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. right-click. and click OK. click Sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.rvt. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 When the title block highlights. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block. Click OK. enter Site Plan. on the Options Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. click Modify.Unnamed. 3 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Name. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. enter A101. For Sheet Number. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

For Client Name. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. under Other. enter For Approval. enter 2009-1. enter Freighthouse Flats. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter J. For Project Number. The new project information displays in the titleblock. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Project Name. 2009. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Status. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . for Project Address. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. click Edit. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 14 Click OK.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Smith. enter 15 May.

and click OK.Sections A108 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 17 In the Project Browser. for Name.Layout Plan A104 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click Save. right-click.Elevations A105 . select the new sheet name. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. enter Floor Plan.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Rename. and click OK. you add views to these sheets. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select A0 metric.Elevations A106 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Stairs In the following exercise. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .rvt.Elevations A107 .

under Floor Plans. click Modify. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The red border around the view no longer displays. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. and click to place it. double-click A104 . 2 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). and click to place the view. and drag it to the sheet. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Elevations. double-click A102 . select Level 1. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt.

and click to place it.Sections. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. align it with the East elevation. double-click A107 .

15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. for View Scale. 16 Select title bar. zoom in to the grip. . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 .Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and press TAB until it highlights. select 1:5. move the cursor over it. and on the Options Bar. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar.

200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 On the Design Bar.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . double-click Level 1.Stairs. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. click Modify. 18 Under Floor Plans. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.

double-click A107 . click Modify. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.rvt.Sections. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . In order to do this. and click Activate View. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. enter 16700 mm. and press ENTER. 2 Select the building section view. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. under Sheets (all). 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. double-click North.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You modify the view to hide the view title. and click Deactivate View. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. After you create the sheet. 7 In the Project Browser.6 Right-click. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.

enter Title Sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 3 In the Project Browser. enter T. select the new sheet name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. double-click Level 1. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. select A0 metric. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click Properties. and click OK. The camera view displays. click Camera. under Floor Plans.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the camera as shown.

13 In the Project Browser. enter 100000 mm. Under Extents.Title Sheet. double-click T . Click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. enter 18000 mm. for Eye Elevation. under Sheets (all). Under Camera. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 1500 mm. 11 On the View Control Bar. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Far Clip Offset. 14 Under 3D Views. select Far Clip Active. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 12 On the View Control Bar. For Target Elevation.

select No. click Duplicate. on the Options Bar. click Size. 22 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. . 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK twice. select Scale (locked proportions). and then click OK. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. Under Model Crop Size. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Apply. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . enter 635 mm. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.15 With the view selected. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height. click Modify. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and click OK. for Show title. under Graphics. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Viewport/no title mark.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Because of the open style floor plan. such as room and window schedules. 207 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. click Training Files. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as doors and windows. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Level 1. expand Floor Plans.rvt. Tagging Objects In this lesson. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. You also learn to create different types of schedules.

2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 5 Using the same method. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. right-click in the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Separation. and click Room and Area.

9 In the Tags dialog. click Load. click Modify. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method. 7 On the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

The room tag number displays in blue. and press ENTER. 11 In the Tags dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 16 On the Design Bar.rfa. click OK. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 14 For Offset. and select the room tag. indicating that it can be edited. type 2400 mm. click Modify. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click it. 13 On the Options Bar. click Room. click Training Files.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. type U18-1. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the room and tag.

type Entry. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . Sequential letters are also supported. place rooms and tags. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. Dining. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. type Kitchen.18 Click the room text label. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Room. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 23 Using the same method. 22 Click the room text label. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 29 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Room Tag. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Level 2. clear Room Separation.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. expand Lines. and click OK. but they need to be tagged. click Modify. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 27 On the Design Bar. and moving clockwise.

you learn how to place door and window tags. 3 On the Options Bar. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Level 1. clear Leader. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

next to Rows.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. The room Number is U17-46. for Name. 101-106. type Storage. For 102. select Corridor. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. For 103. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . type Corridor. 11 Using the same method. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. add 5 more rooms. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. type Building Entry. select Storage. For 105. and press ENTER. click New. for room 101. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 104.

13 Save the file. Under Custom colors. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. and click OK. under Visibility. and modify room names. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the Line Graphics dialog. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . For Room Separation. click the bright green swatch.■ For 106.rvt. For Weight. expand Lines. and press ENTER. place rooms from a program list. In the Lines field. 4 Click OK twice. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Color field. click the Lines field. type Stair. under Projection/Surface. you add room separation lines. click Override. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select 9. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.

click Room. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line. First. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room Separation.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Modify. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 .

type 2400 mm. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 13 On the Options Bar. for Room. select 101 Building Entry. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage.

select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 19 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. place the following rooms. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 16 Using the same method. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . and zoom in to the Corridor.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. click Modify. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Room Schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 While pressing CTRL. double-click Level 1. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. under Floor Plans.

24 Open the Room Schedule. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Base Finish. click Modify. while pressing CTRL. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click New. click 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. Floor Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and for all 3 finishes. 30 On the Options Bar. clear Room Bounding. under Available fields. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click Add. type Units. 31 For Key Name. under Category. type As Selected. select Rooms.21 On the Options Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. (Element Properties). for Rows. and Wall Finish. 27 Select Schedule keys. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Schedule/Quantities.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . under Floor Plans. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. click Check None. 43 In the Filter dialog. select Units. select Rooms. click Edit. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. under Other. 36 Click OK twice. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 42 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. select Units. add 2 more key names: Service and Public.32 Using the same method. under Schedules/Quantities. 44 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. for Room Style. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. for Available fields. and click Add. and click Properties. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Room Style. 37 Open the Room Schedule. right-click Room Schedule. click (Filter Selection). click (Element Properties). select Room Style. and click OK. for Fields. 38 Under U17-8. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 33 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. at the warning prompt. select Room Style. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and apply it to the Level 1 view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click OK.rvt. click 5 For Title. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. type Room Type. For rooms 102 and 105. under Views (all). 104. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. right-click Level 1.46 Open the Room Schedule. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Graphics. expand Floor Plans. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 48 Save the file. under Floor Plans. (Duplicate). type Room Type. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click the Color Scheme field. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. and 106. click OK. select Service. for Name. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. for Color. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. and click OK. select Public. and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 103.

a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Visibility. clear Visible. click Modify. click the value in the Color column. and click OK. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Schemes. click Color Scheme Legend. 14 Click OK twice. expand Lines. 17 On the Design Bar. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 19 On the Options Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and clear Room Separation. click Edit Color Scheme. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select Room Type. click Edit. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 .11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the color legend.

29 Click OK twice. 28 Under Title Text. 30 On the Design Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . respectively. (Element Properties). type 25 mm. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Swatch Width. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. type 5 mm. and click OK. on the Options Bar. select blue. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected.22 In the Color dialog. 23 Using the same method. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK. for Size. under Graphics. click Modify. under Custom color.

38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 35 Click OK twice. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. click Color Scheme Legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. double-click Building Section. under Sections. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. and select Properties. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Sections. for Color Scheme. under Visibility. select Room Type. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. under Graphics. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. click Edit. right-click Building Section. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

under Identity Data. under Identity Data. (Filter Selection). 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Rooms. click . 42 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. select Units. 41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 44 In the Element Properties dialog.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. for Room Style. select Public. 46 Click . and click OK. 45 While pressing CTRL. select all the rooms in the stairwell.

and click . Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . and click OK. under Identity Data. 54 While pressing CTRL. under Key Name for the new row. excluding the stairwell spaces. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. click New. under Schedules/Quantities. select Service.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. for Room Style. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. double-click Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. type Suites. 51 On the Options Bar. for Rows.

The color fill will extend to the roof. 59 Under Room Area Computation. select Areas and Volumes. for Room Style. select the room on the left side of the top floor. under Identity Data. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. under Volume Computations. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. and click OK. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . verify that At wall finish is selected. but not beyond it. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select Suites. The color fill extends to the roof.55 Click .

the dining room. select Loft. under Constraints. and click 65 For Limit Offset.0. 71 Click OK.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 On the first level. for Upper Limit. select the stairwell room. 70 For Limit Offset. type -254 mm. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. select Level 2. 72 On the Design Bar. for Upper Limit. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 68 Click . 66 Click OK. type 0. click Modify. and the living room. .

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.73 Save the file. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. double-click {3D}. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. under 3D Views.

select Family and Type.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. select Roofs. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 .EPDM. For Then by. 9 Using the same method. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. under Category. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select Material: Description.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Select Grand totals. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. click Family and Type. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 3 While pressing CTRL. and click Add. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Clear Itemize every instance. and click OK. under Available fields.

21 Click OK. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). select Material: Area. and under Fields. for Name. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 17 Click Calculated Value. and click OK twice. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for Fields. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. and click Properties. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 20 For Formula. type Estimated Cost. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. for Material: Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. and click Add. under Other. 12 Click OK. 23 For Field formatting. click Estimated Cost. 19 For Type.40 50. Under Field formatting. select Material: Cost. click the Formatting tab. click Edit. select Currency. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Calculate totals. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Available fields.

not just for currency. 26 In the Project Units dialog. These shared parameters can be added to any family. which inserts commas after every three digits. can be used for any number-based parameter. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. for Currency. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. and reporting the shared parameters.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and schedule the total distance of each path. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and are defined and stored in an external file. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. In this lesson. 31 Save the file. you create a shared parameter file. either within family components or within the project template. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you create an exiting plan for the building. 29 Select Use digit grouping. You draw a travel path line. The cost fields are formatted correctly. 30 Click OK twice. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. select $. regardless of category. 27 In the Format dialog. adding the shared parameters to a family. click the Format value. for Rounding. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. tag the line. 28 For Unit symbol. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Digit grouping.

type Travel Distance. type OfficeStandardsParameters.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. click Training Files. for File name. type Path ID.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Groups. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Length. click New. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. 9 Under Parameters. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.txt. under Floor Plans. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Create. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. for Name. 7 Under Parameters. and click OK. 11 Click OK twice. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. type Exiting. click New. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. for Type of Parameter.

rvt. under Dimensions. 15 If necessary. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. select Shared parameter. click Family Types. under Parameter Type. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Constraints. type Length. click Add. and click OK. under Parameters. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . otherwise the family loads into the current project. If you have multiple projects open.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise.rvt. click Add. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Click Training Files. under Parameters. click Load into Projects. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and click OK. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Family Types dialog. for Group parameter under. 11 Click OK. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 10 Using the same method. under Parameter Data. in the Load into Projects dialog. following the equals symbol (=). you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and select Instance. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. for Travel Distance Formula. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 8 Select Instance. 3 On the Design Bar. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. and click Select. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rfa. and click OK. group it under Dimensions. 13 Click Apply. 14 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Family Types dialog.

(Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. select Travel Distance.rft. click Training Files. and click OK. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Label. click (Add Parameter). select Travel Distance. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click Select. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. under Parameters. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. 24 Click OK twice. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click parameter(s) to label). 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 19 On the Design Bar.

28 On the Design Bar.rfa. select Path ID. and click Save.rvt is selected. click Modify. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. click Load into Projects. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 29 In the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 35 Save the file. 32 In the Save As dialog. and press DELETE. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and click OK. and move it down. 33 On the Design Bar. for File Name.

under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. and click in the center of the corridor.rvt. After the lines are tagged. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. above the exterior door as shown.Level 1. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Tagging. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component.Placing. 4 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. select Chain. 6 Move the cursor to the right. double-click Exiting Plan .

under Constraints. 8 On the Design Bar. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. Placing. click Tag ➤ By Category. through the door. click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner.7 Move the cursor down. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. double click Exiting Plan . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines. and click (Element Properties). 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL.Level 2. click Component. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear Leader. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar.Tagging. for Path ID. and click outside of the building. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. type 1-1.

20 On the Design Bar. and click above the door to the stair. and click in the stair. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor down. move the cursor to the left.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. click Component. and click. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 28 While pressing CTRL. . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Placing. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . type Level 1 Exit Distance. 27 On the Design Bar. type 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 30 Using the same method. for Path ID. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.Tagging. under Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. click Modify. and click OK.24 On the Design Bar. 33 For Name. and click OK. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. under Constraints. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.

rvt. and click Rename. 49 Click OK twice. 36 For Filter by. select Travel Distance. and click Add. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. in the first field. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. under Available fields. 44 In the Project Browser. for Filter. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Calculate totals. 42 Click OK. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 41 Under Fields. click Edit. 35 Click the Filter tab. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 40 Click the Formatting tab. in the second field. type 2-. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. type 1-. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 38 For Sort by. select contains. for Filter by. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Path ID and Travel Distance. while pressing CTRL. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Path ID. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 50 Save the file. and in the third field. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click OK. 46 In the Project Browser. and under Field formatting. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Other. 43 In the Project Browser.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. in the third field. and click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise.

select the following fields.Fixed Partitions. under Identity Data. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. for Assembly Code. right-click the Design Bar. select Walls.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. and click View. and click Properties. 4 Under Available fields. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and select C1010145 .Partitions . 10 In the schedule. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Interiors ➤ C10 .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . and click . click the Value field. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. under Categories. click the Fields tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click Generic . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. expand C .152 mm. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.

and click Next. for Database Name. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish. the database display may be different than that shown. under Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 1 On the File menu.mdb). you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click Training Files. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. type Revit_Project. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.mdb. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access.11 Close the exercise file. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click Create. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click the File Data Source tab. 3 Click New. select a location for the database file. 8 In the New Database dialog. 9 Under Directories. and click OK to create the database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 11 Click OK 3 times. click OK. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source.

and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Additionally. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. in addition to the Id column. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 13 Close the exercise file. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. For example. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 .

262 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. 263 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. These components display at the required scale. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. 297 . Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. like a standard door header condition. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. In the callout view. add detail components. and metal studs. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you trace over the building model geometry. plywood. In order to detail from the building model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Detail Component. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.rfa. and click OK. 5 In the alert dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click Training Files. as well as detail lines. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Detailing the View In this exercise. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you detail the view of the roof edge. After you add components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the drawing area. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and click Open. You load detail components. region objects.rvt. select As underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click the detail callout head. They are also view specific. which means that all detail components. click Training Files. Exact location is not important. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and insulation objects. The roof overhang detail displays.

click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. click (Element Properties). click Edit/New. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. select Corrugated Metal. 19 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail.8 Delete the component. Detailing the View | 299 . click Modify. enter 406. 15 For Spacing. 10 On the Options Bar. click Repeating Detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. and click OK. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Click OK twice. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.5mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click Training Files. click Load. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. and click Open. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. ■ ■ Click Modify. click (Move). Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. and on the Edit toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.

32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. and click Open. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 31 To properly orient the component. click Training Files. you load them as a group from a single file. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar.rvt. Detailing the View | 301 .Because you still have several components to load. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. 33 In the Type Selector. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. press SPACEBAR 3 times. and place it in the detail view as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 37 Click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. select Chain. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment.

Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. as shown. enter 140mm. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. select to near side. 42 Click Modify. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click (Move). click Detail Component. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. For Offset. click Insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. Detailing the View | 303 .

select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. click Detail Lines. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. they are view specific. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Like detail components.45 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. meaning they display only in this view. and lock the component. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 47 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 51 Click Modify.rvt. as shown. you add lines to your detail. select Thin Lines. 2 In the Type Selector.

5 Select the vertical plywood component. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. enter 10mm. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar.4 Click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. as shown. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . as shown. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. For Offset. For Offset. enter 10mm. 10 On the Design Bar.

16 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. and clear Chain. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click (Draw). 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. click Detail Lines. enter 10mm. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Do not display. and click Properties. right-click.18 In the Type Selector. and click OK. draw the detail lines as shown. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Adding Detail Lines | 307 . select Thin Lines. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. select the Penthouse level line. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. When you turn the display model off. select Vapor Barrier. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. For Offset. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. Click (Pick Lines). 22 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. you add text notes to complete the detail. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 32 Click Modify. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.29 On the Design Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 30 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes on page 308. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

Adding Text Notes | 309 . and click to place the dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Dimension. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click Text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 Click Modify. Enter the text. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 2 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader.

7 Select the dimension line. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). under Text Fields. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. select a text note. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click the dimension text. right-click. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area.rvt. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. Creating Detail Components on page 310. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typ. and save the exercise file. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click Rename. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Select All Instances. and click OK. right-click. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click 6 In the Filter dialog. for Suffix. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. (Filter Selection). right-click. and press DELETE. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. and click OK..Keynotes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. on the Options Bar.

16 Click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. Creating Detail Components | 311 . while pressing CTRL. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping.7 Click Modify. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. pressing TAB.rft. 15 Use a window to select all linework. and selecting the chain. click Training Files. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. in the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. select all the coping linework. and click Open. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 14 Click Modify.

21 To place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. The original linework remains selected.Keynotes view is not the open view. 27 On the Design Bar. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . click Detail Component. and the component can be placed in the detail.rfa. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Load. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 22 Click Modify. click Load into Projects. you place keynotes on objects. click . and click OK. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to your preferred location. 28 On the Options Bar. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 30 In the drawing area. 26 Press DELETE. 25 In the Filter dialog. select the coping. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Detail Items. 24 On the Options Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 312. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. delete the underlying linework. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Training Files. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.18 In the Save As dialog. enter Roof Edge. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 23 Using a window. double-click it in the Project Browser. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. and click Open. click Detail Component. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. While pressing SHIFT. for File name. and click Save. 31 Using the same method used previously.

rvt. use keynote 07645. click Keynote ➤ Element. Click to place the leader arm. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 6 Click Modify. Adding Keynotes | 313 . 63mm Rigid Insulation.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. For the metal coping. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. click Training Files. 2 In the alert dialog. (Element Properties).rfa.D11. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click OK. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. In the Keynotes dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06160.C1. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.B5. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 19mm Plywood. Roof Edge4. and click Open.

For the 50 x 150. 11 Click OK 3 times. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 06110. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. For the 50 x 300. using keynote 07460. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. use keynote 09250. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. use keynote 06110. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.F1. 22mm Corrugated Steel . the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.20 Ga.D11. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. and click . You do this in order to keynote the component. 18 Save the file.F1. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. navigate to 07645. FasciaProfile_1.I1.D1. For the 50 x 200.A8. select Corrugated Metal. click in the Value column. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 17 Keynote the component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 06160. use keynote 06110.9 In the Type Properties dialog. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. click Keynote ➤ Element. 15 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .G1.

14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 6 Lock the line. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rvt. 19 In the Name dialog. for File name. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location.rft. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. click Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 22 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Edit/New. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 8 In the Save As dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify. 24 While pressing CTRL. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click Modify. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 11 Press DELETE. select Medium Line Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. click Load. 16 Select the component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. and click Open. and select the right end point. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click Save. and click Open.

33 In the Type Properties dialog.G1. 31 Select the component.A1. click (Move). 42 Using the same method used previously. 49 With the component selected. and click OK. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. enter EPDM Membrane. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 40 Click Modify. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. invisible. 28 In the Type Selector. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 06110. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 07260. 47 Select the component. 27 On the Design Bar. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and hidden) used in the view. 48 Using the same method used previously.25 Next. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Duplicate. 44 On the Design Bar. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and click . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click Edit/New.A5. on the Edit toolbar. 30 Click Modify. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click . and click . against the 19mm plywood. 29 In the drawing area. 34 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. 37 Click OK 3 times. and click . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click in the Value column. 38 On the Design Bar. and click the lower end at the break line. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Detail Component. 46 Click Modify. You add the components to the project and keynote them. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 41 Select the component just added. name the component Air Barrier. click Detail Component.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . and click . select Chain. click Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. leaving the detail component lines. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component.

name the component Vapor Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. click Detail Component. select the component. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 63 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. 61 In the drawing area. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07260. 50 x 200 Framing. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. click Load into Projects.rfa. click Keynote ➤ Element. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.rfa. 68 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 67 In the Type Selector.A4. 60 On the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously.

you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and press ENTER. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. name the component Batt Insul. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A1. Enter 07460.rvt. and assign it keynote 07210. 70 Using the method used previously. 71 In the drawing area. and click . Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 72 Save the file. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 07463. under Keynote Table.A4. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . and close the text editor.69 Select the component. click File menu ➤ Save. click Browse. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press TAB. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric.txt.A9.. 3 In the text editor. add a keynote for the component. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. The database file opens in a text editor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and press TAB.

you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. select Absolute. 11 Click Modify. and click to place the note. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. navigate to 07463. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. These details do not update with changes to the building model. and click Open. 14 Save the file. click to place the leader. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 13 Click Modify.txt. In the Type Selector. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. and click OK. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click OK. 9 In the drawing area. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing .A1. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. After you create a drafting view. select all the keynotes. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). under Path Type. click Keynote ➤ Element.

you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. click Training Files.rvt.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.rvt. For Colors. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. The detail that you import is in DWG format. For Positioning. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Black and White. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Center to Center is selected. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. right-click Drafting 1. The detail is imported as an import symbol. and click Rename. Click Open. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. verify that Auto .dwg. select 1 : 5. for Scale.

No Reference. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Rename. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename dialog. for New. select Reference other view. click Edit/New. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Callout. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 3 On the Options Bar. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. and click Properties. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. delete the existing value. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 5 Click Modify. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Select the callout.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK twice. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. enter Detail . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

double-click A105 . click Modify. and double-click the callout. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 ./Det. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.Elev.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.No Reference). The callout is updated with the sheet information. 18 Save the file. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all)./Sect. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.

enter Header @ Sliding Door.rvt. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Board. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. and click OK. select Gypsum-Plaster. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times. 11 In the Name dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 5 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. enter Gyp. . click Region Properties. and click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Name. click Edit/New. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Filled Region.

Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click Modify. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the width dimension. and enter 20. select the left and bottom edges of the region. (Mirror). click Finish Sketch. Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select Wide Lines. click . and on the Edit toolbar. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. 20 On the Design Bar.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector.5mm. click (Draw).

click Region Properties. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. . click Duplicate. 33 Click OK 3 times. enter Wood .Finish.Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Filled Region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Move the cursor up. click Edit/New. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. for Name.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 In the Name dialog. 24 Select the mirrored region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 25 Click Modify. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wood . 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 29 In the Type Properties dialog.

35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines. and select the right edge of the wood region. click (Rectangle). 40 On the Options Bar. sketch the new region as shown. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector. click . verify that the thickness is 19mm. select Medium Lines.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 On the Design Bar. click (Align).5mm. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. Draw a rectangle as shown. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region.

For Offset. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. For Offset. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter 10mm. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 46 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. enter 6mm. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 47 Click the reference plane.42 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click 48 Click Modify. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. (Align).

Move the cursor right 25mm. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Move the cursor down 305mm. 56 On the Design Bar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. click (Trim/Extend). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and press ENTER. For Offset. and click to select the point.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Select Chain. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the point. Move the cursor left 25mm. and click to select the point. enter 0. 54 On the Tools toolbar. and select the bottom horizontal line.

and press ENTER. 62 Select the left detail line. top. and press ENTER.rfa. 58 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. enter 3mm. enter 76. click Training Files. select the height dimension. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.2mm.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 65 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 61 Click Modify. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. For Offset. and right edges of the door panel region. click Load. and click Open. 68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. 60 Select the left. select Medium Lines. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Lines. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

click Training Files. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. 76 In the Type Selector. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. click Detail Lines. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . click Load. click Detail Component. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. use the images as a guide.rfa. and click Open.70 On the Design Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 71 On the Options Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt.

select Thin Lines. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click . and on the Edit toolbar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. (Mirror). 79 In the Type Selector. 87 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 82 Select the rectangle.78 On the Design Bar. click . 85 On the Options Bar. 84 On the Design Bar. 80 On the Options Bar.

88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 90 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror). 89 On the Design Bar. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. select Medium Lines. 92 Select the line. click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. as shown.

and press ENTER. 102 In the Type Selector. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Lines. click Detail Component. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 95 On the Design Bar. 99 Click Modify. click . 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. select the length dimension. enter 3mm.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click to place the arc as shown. 101 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. select M_Break Line.

109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 106 Click to place the dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 108 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar. 110 Select the dimension line. and click Modify. using the Drag Text grip.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region.5mm Arial. 105 In the drawing area. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension.

select Replace With Text. and click the dimension text. select Replace With Text.5mmArial. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . under Dimension Value. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 114 Click OK. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. under Dimension Value. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 113 Under Text Fields. click Dimension. and then click the dimension text. and enter Varies. enter See Schedule. for Below.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown.2.

129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 123 Click OK. click Text. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 125 In the Options Bar. Board. click (Add Right Arc Leader). and click Modify. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B.121 Click OK. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 128 Select the note. and click to place the text. 127 Enter Gyp. click to create an arced leader. select the gypsum board region on the left. 126 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.

click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar.

and double-click East. 339 . you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial.rvt.

8 Select the keynote. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. for Number of Leaders. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Hexagon. 7 On the Design Bar.rfa. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Training Files.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. type 1. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.

12 On the Edit toolbar. 13 Select the tag. for Text. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. type Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Element Properties). Creating a Note Block | 341 . click (Copy). and click OK.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click above the tag to place the copy.

(Mirror). 17 Click OK.14 With the copy selected. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 16 For Tag. on the Options Bar. 18 Using the same method. 15 For Text. type Repair existing door surround. click Copy. and click. 19 With the tag selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type B. and on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click (Element Properties). position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Edit toolbar.

using the table as a reference. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. Clean exterior brick wall. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. and moving counter-clockwise. 22 Optionally. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Tuckpoint as required. Repair existing door surround. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.

and click OK. and select Bold. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. format. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type 6 mm. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. On the Appearance tab. On the Formatting tab. for Sort by. for Heading. 27 In the column header (text).Elevations. and for Alignment. select Tag. verify that Arial is selected. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. under Available fields. type Description. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Header text. expand Schedules/Quantities. 28 In the Project Browser. 26 Click OK. 29 In the Project Browser. type Exterior Construction Notes. type Mark. select Exterior Construction Notes. for the value. select Center. and double-click A103 . 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click Add. select Tag. for Note block name. Create.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. Select Text. expand Sheets (all). 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

32 Zoom in to see the note block. double-click T . Using Drawing Lists | 345 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.Title Sheet.rvt. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all). 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify.

7 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. for Filter by.Title Sheet. and click Add. under Available fields. select Sheet Number. type T. The drawing list displays. 6 In the Project Browser. in the first field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. in the second field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag it to the sheet. expand Schedules/Quantities. On the Filter tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sheet Number. and click Add. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. under Sheets (all). ■ 4 Click OK. select Sheet Number. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. select does not equal. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and in the third field. double-click T .2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Index. Select Sheet Name. 5 In the list title field.

windows. click Modify. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Finally. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. For the text. door frame schedule. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Training File Using Legends | 347 . Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 11 Save the file.9 On the Design Bar. On construction documents. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. and door frames. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. doors. On construction documents.

Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Edit/New. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. click Duplicate. for Name. type Legend Text. type Typical Symbol Legend.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 10 For Text Size. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 3mm. click Symbol. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. click Text. 9 For Text Font. you create a text type with the necessary size.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. for Name.Open Level Head . select Arial. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

Site Plan/Floor Plan. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and for Leader. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . expand Sheets (all). and click to place it. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 16 In the Project Browser. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 14 Working from the top down. verify that is selected. expand Legends. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Typical Symbol Legend.

18 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . 23 Save the file. 22 On the Design Bar.17 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. under Sheets. click Modify. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.

3 For Scale. and press ENTER. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.rvt. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select 1 : 50. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type 4th Floor Wall Types. click Legend Component. for Name. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 5 On the View Control Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. For Host length. type 900 mm. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select Medium for Detail Level. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select Section. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. For View.

9 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. for Family. 13 On the Options Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 10 Select the second wall. for Leader. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click Modify. and on the Options Bar.

click to add text with a single-segment leader. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 19 Type the following text. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. and click New Sheet. The text note with leader is added to the legend. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Level 4. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . right-click Sheets (all). 23 In the Project Browser.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the new sheet. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.

354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Legends. The open drawings are both visible. drag it onto the sheet. click Modify to end the command. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types.25 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Floor Plans. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click Level 4. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 29 In the Project Browser.

Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 34 Select the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select the Wall Type 2 component. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. click (Match Type). 35 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Medium.

You can create a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. or changes in building material availability. Using the table.36 Optionally. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. click 37 Save the file. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. In this exercise. contractor inquiries. double-click Level 4. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. under Floor Plans. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. These changes can be due to owner requests.

For example. yet as concise as possible. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. if the active revision is number 1. When you use this option. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. If Visible is not selected. In general. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 Under Show. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. the revision is locked and issued to the field. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. type a date. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. When Issued is selected. 5 For Description. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. If you select Per Sheet. verify that Per Project is selected. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. In most instances. for Numbering.

you make changes to the project floor plan. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 On the Edit toolbar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views.rvt. double-click Level 4. click (Move). Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. click Modify. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 6 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up. 3 Select the divider.8 Click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 5 Select the divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. including revision number and revision date. 9 Save the file. Revision clouds have read-only properties.

11 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and click OK. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 8 In the drawing area.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Snaps Off. click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. In the Snaps dialog. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click near the partition you moved.

select 6. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. for Line Weight. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 16 Click OK. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 Save the file. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. you load a revision tag into the project.

4 On the Options Bar. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click Tags. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.rvt. 11 Click to place the tag. Because you chose to number by project. the cloud is tagged as number 1. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. and because the revision is the first in the project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 10 In the drawing area.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 In the Tags dialog. double-click Level 4.rfa. 8 In the Tags dialog. click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. Working with Revisions In this exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. You then issue a revision. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. select Leader. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you need to add one. 12 Save the file. 6 Click Load. you create additional revisions in the revision table.

click Add. type Modify Paving Area. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. under Sheets.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and enter a date. 7 For Description. You can continue to add revisions. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. you can no longer modify it. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 8 Add another revision row. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. you prevent further changes to the revision. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision. and click OK. select Issued. NOTE After you issue a revision. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.Unnamed. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. with the description Relocate Door. double-click A107 . Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.rvt. and enter a date for the revision.

3 . apply Seq. 17 Using the same method learned previously. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew.Modify Paving Area. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. double-click A107 . for Revision. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. click to add a revision clouds. select Revision Cloud. double-click Level 4.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 20 On the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 11 On the Drafting tab. select the revision cloud. 2 . 19 To add tags. select Tag ➤ By Category. in the drawing area. Working with Revisions | 363 .Unnamed. 15 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). select Seq. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 13 Click Finish Sketch.

You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. For each revision. and rotation) to the revision schedule. beginning with "D". for Sequence.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. select Alphabetic. clear Issued. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. Click Options. delete the first 3 characters. you edit the titleblock family. height. for Numbering. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 25 Click OK twice. 26 In the drawing area. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. You do this so that the revision can be changed. select the titleblock.

37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Select Outline. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. click Edit.27 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the schedule header. and drag it above the schedule area. 28 In the alert dialog. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Select Grid lines. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. click Yes. for Build Schedule. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. Clear Blank row before data. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. and click Properties. 34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. click Yes. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . click Load into Projects. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. click Edit Family. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. right-click Revision Schedule. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. and press DELETE. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. for Appearance. select Bottom-up. under Other.

open the titleblock family for editing. 45 On the Appearance tab. select 90° Counterclockwise. for Rotation on Sheet. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. With a user-defined height. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. under Other. and on the Options Bar. 46 Click OK twice. for Formatting.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and click Properties. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Height. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select User defined.. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 40 Select the revision schedule header. select the revision schedule. enter Rev. When the height property is variable. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. for Heading. right-click Revision Schedule. click Edit. and the most current revisions display in the available rows.

Importing from Other Applications | 367 . 50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Yes. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. text. you learn to import information (such as images. 51 Save the file. click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project.

and place it on a sheet. for Leader. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Training Files. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click T . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click to add text without a leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Importing Image Files In this exercise. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. under Sheets.JPG. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet.Title Sheet. 5 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. with the new text box still selected. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. click Modify.doc text file in another window. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 6 Select the text. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 11 Save the file. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 9 On the Design Bar.

Unit 18. This process may vary from system to system. for Name.xls. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select the document writer. type Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. and click Save. 12 Save the file. click Training Files. under Sheets. 10 On the Design Bar.JPG. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. This step has been completed for you. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.mdi. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.rvt. double-click A102 . 3 In Microsoft Excel. 5 Click OK. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click Modify.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click Desktop. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This exercise demonstrates a common method.JPG. for File name. click File menu ➤ Print.

or footprint. you break up the plan into sections. called dependent views. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 371 .

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 .

under Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click Level 2. enter Level 2 . right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Rename. select the crop region. double-click Level 2. and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 6 In the drawing area. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. click Zoom To Fit. and the model crop is the interior crop region.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Aviary.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 On the View Control Bar. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

click Zoom To Fit. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. 14 Click in the drawing area. enter Level 2 .10 Click in the drawing area. 15 Select the crop region. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. for Name. 11 In the Project Browser. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Labs. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Matchline. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. and on the Zoom flyout. under Floor Plans.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 18 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click Modify.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

enter Level 2 Aviary. click Level 2 . for Name. under Floor Plans. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. expand Sheets. for Line Weight. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. right-click A101 . 28 For Line Pattern. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and drag it onto the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . and click OK. 27 Under Matchline. select 9. select Double Dash. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click OK.Unnamed.Aviary. 33 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.

35 On the Design Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. click View Reference. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet. for Target view. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. under Floor Plans. 39 On the Options Bar.Aviary is selected. and place the Level 2 . click Modify. double-click Level 2.

select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 45 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. for Target view.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Modify. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit.

after modifying the annotation crop region. double-click Level 2 . click the far right control. 49 If. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 48 Select the crop region. click (Show Crop Region). the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.Aviary. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. right-click.46 In the Project Browser. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 47 On the View Control Bar. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. under Floor Plans.

under Floor Plans. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. expand Level 1.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 52 In the Project Browser. 55 On the Zoom flyout. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 54 In the Project Browser. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and click OK. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Zoom To Fit. and click Apply Dependent Views. select all views in the list. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . right-click Level 2.

right-click South Elevation. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). The matchline is already placed in the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Zoom To Fit.57 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click Rename. 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. enter South Elevation . right-click South Elevation. for Name.Right. 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.Left. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region).The dependent view opens. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 3 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and drag it toward the center of the view. enter South Elevation . cropping the view to the lab building. expand South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary. and click OK. and click Rename. for Name. select the Crop Region. 5 In the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Select the crop region. 7 On the View Control Bar.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View on page 403. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. on the View tab of the Design Bar. The perspective view displays. click Camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

double-click Site. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted.3 Zoom out. as shown. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. as necessary. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . and adjust the field of vision. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1. in the Project Browser. Depending on camera placement. under Floor Plans. and select the crop boundary. With the camera shown. If the camera is not shown in the view.

10 Save the file. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views.Day. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click Rename. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day to open the view. enter Exterior .

rvt. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You then duplicate the view.Day. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. and render a daytime view of the exterior.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. modify render settings.

click (Show Rendering Dialog). under Lighting. You adjust cloud settings as required. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. under Background. for Setting.Santa Monica. select Sky: Cloudy. for Sun. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. select Medium. In this case. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. and click Render. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3pm. 3 In the Rendering dialog. NOTE If a background image is required. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. and click Rename. 7 In the Rendering dialog. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 6 Click OK twice.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. You create a location and time for the rendering. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for New. 8 Under Quality. select Spring Equinox. 5 In the Rename dialog. select Edit/New. enter Spring Equinox .

Click Save. select Portable Network Graphics (*. For Files of type. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.9 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. 10 In the Rendering dialog.png). After the image is rendered. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Show the rendering. click Export. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model.

19 In the New Light Group dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. enter Pool Lights. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. under Ungrouped Lights. verify that Pool Lights is selected.Flat Round : 60W . under Group Options. for Name. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click New. press and hold SHIFT. 22 Using the same method. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. right-click Exterior . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . and click OK. and click Move to Group.Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W . you duplicate the view and change the settings. To select a sequential list. click Render. 25 Using the same method. click OK.120V. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W . under 3D Views. click New.Night. on the View Control Bar. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 27 In the Rendering dialog.Day. and select the last light. under Lighting. under Group Options. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.Day view to Exterior .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. add 30 :Sconce Light . To create a similar view using different rendering settings. and click OK.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .Night view open. enter Pool House Lights. dialog. click Dialog). for Name. and click Artificial Lights. select the first light. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . highlight 9 :Sconce Light . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only.120V to the Pool Lights group. 16 With the Exterior . for Scheme.Exterior .120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. and click OK.Night.

30 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Show the model. 32 Save the file. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. under Image. enter 4. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. you change the brightness of the exposure.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. In this example. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. click Adjust Exposure. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. After the image is rendered.

Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.rvt. render the views. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and finally. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. define the perspective view and rendering settings. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

and on the Edit toolbar. the person’s line of sight. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. 4 In the Type Selector. select RPC Female : YinYin. click Component. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. double-click Level 1. click Modify.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the figure. ■ (Rotate). Adding RPC People | 413 . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and place the component inside the pool house. Exact placement is not important.

click Modify. select Cast Reflections. 14 Save the file. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Parameters. click Edit. you can enable this option. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. In order to see the figure’s reflection. click Edit/New. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. on the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. for Render Appearance Properties. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click (Element Properties). 12 Click OK 3 times. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. By default.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.

416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. and click Properties.The perspective view displays. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering.

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click Level 1. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 9 In the Project Browser. in addition to the 3D view. under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . In order to accurately adjust the section box. 11 In the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. select the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click South.

14 In the 3D view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. right-click. select the section box.12 In the floor plan view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown.

you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. doors that contain windows or glass. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. and curtain walls. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall.15 Maximize the 3D view. 17 Save the file. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. To create a daytime view. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419.

8 In the Rendering dialog. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. and click OK. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. under Lighting. select Interior: Artificial only. right-click 3D View 1. clear Pool Lights. 5 Click Artificial Lights. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. select Draft. click Render. 2 In the Rename View dialog. After these settings are established. for Setting. you turn them off for this scene. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK. enter Interior .Night. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. You can specify a lower quality. 4 In the Rendering dialog.rvt. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click (Show Rendering Dialog). 7 Under Quality. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections.

and click Render. and click OK. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. For more information on daylight portals. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . select Curtain Walls. but the space will receive standard daylighting. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. you must create a custom setting. You create a view for the interior during the day. for Scheme. select Interior: Sun only.Santa Monica. the daylight portals can be turned on. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.9 Close the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. (Show Rendering Dialog).Night. 17 In the Rendering dialog. The preset schemes are read-only. in order to turn on daylight portals. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. right-click Interior . IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. click 14 For Setting. select Edit. 3pm. for Daylight Portal Options. In this case. For sunlit interiors. By default they are turned off. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. select Spring Equinox .Day. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. for Sun. 13 In the Rendering dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Region.

Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. and close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. enter 1. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. enter 10. click Properties). Click OK. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Adjust Exposure.18 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. and on the Options Bar. select the column on the right. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. For Saturation. In the next steps. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood.

The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 26 Click Update Preview. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. select High. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and click OK. select Based on wood grain. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. the render time increases significantly. for Setting. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. select Wood. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and click Render. For Rotate. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. click the dimensions for Size. clear Region. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.6. As size and DPI are increased. For Bump. click OK. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. enter 90. For Width. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . 29 In the Rendering dialog. select Printer. select the crop boundary. You change the varnish setting.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the drawing area. select Scale (locked proportions). and on the Options Bar. for Resolution. 23 With the column still selected. enter 5''. select Unfinished. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. Click OK. add a bump map to create texture. under Output Settings. 24 In the Materials dialog. For Amount.

you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. In a plan view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009.The rendered image displays. or section view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. elevation. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. independent of the Revit Architecture software. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Usually. The walkthrough path is a spline. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you rendered an exterior and an interior view.

NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. expand Views (all). TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Walkthrough. and ends in the far corner of the living room. proceeds through the dining room. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the Options Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . verify that Perspective is selected.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and change unit formats as desired. and double-click 1st Floor. click Settings ➤ Project Units. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values.

and double-click Walkthrough 1. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Finish.

and for Height. 14 Click . 12 On the View menu. and click OK. enter 1.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 9''. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. select the crop boundary. and select the crop boundary. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. verify that Field of view is selected. for Frame. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. 17 Click . If it is not. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. 11 Under Change. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click the dimensions for Size. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . enter 16''. click Edit Walkthrough. for Width.

proceed to the next exercise. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. click Edit Walkthrough. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. c_Townhouse. and click OK. clear Far Clip Active. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser.The walkthrough plays. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. under Floor Plans. press ESC. 2 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. double-click 1st Floor.

and drag it to the location shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the third key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). select Path.

If you are unsure of what option to use. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. under Walkthroughs. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. click Edit Walkthrough. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. shading. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. enter 15. select <Shading>. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. on the Options Bar. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds.rvt. . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Walkthrough 1. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. or rendering. When you export the walkthrough. 9 To play the walkthrough. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. hidden line. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. c_Townhouse. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. under Output Length. 8 If you want to save this exercise. reducing the size of the image. click File menu ➤ Save As. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. and click OK. shading with edges. The walkthrough is recorded. for Frames/sec. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. specifying the number of frames. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. for Model Graphics Style. and click Save. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and click OK. for Compressor. 3 Under Format.

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. More specifically. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. In this tutorial. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. 431 .

and double-click 01 Entry. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. (SteeringWheels). 4 On the View toolbar. click shown. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Courtyard View In this exercise. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.Creating a Solar Study . expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.rvt.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.Courtyard View. 3 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. if necessary. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . click Save As. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. as shown. right-click 3D View 1. double-click 01 Entry. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 9 On the File menu. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Solar Study . 6 Click the view boundary to select it. under Floor Plans. click Section.5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

click Modify. and click Rename. click . 11 On the SteeringWheel. expand Sections. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. as shown. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway.5 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 8 In the Rename View dialog. 6 To view the section. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. double-click the section head. 13 On the Design Bar. right-click Section 1. click 10 On the View toolbar. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway.

Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. under 3D Views. including the house. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Typical plan views. 15 In the Rename View dialog. do not display many elements in 3D. In some cases. click Callout. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click Rename. clear Section Boxes. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 18 On the File menu. as shown. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. click . 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. double-click 01 Entry. and click OK. and click Rename. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 16 On the View Control Bar. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 4 In the Project Browser. 17 To hide the section box. then Fine. under Floor Plans. click Save. then select Medium. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. and click OK. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. right-click {3D}. you create a plan cutaway view.

15 Select the Roof. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.8 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. as shown. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click (SteeringWheels). so you can see into the building from the top. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Modify. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. as shown. 9 On the SteeringWheel.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 21 On the File menu.17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. and click OK. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. under 3D Views. click Save. 19 In the Rename View dialog. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. right-click {3D}. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . 18 In the Project Browser. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 20 On the View Control Bar. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

click click OK.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. leave the slider at 50. you specify the location. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 2 On the View Control Bar. you specify the location. single-day. and click Duplicate. date range. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. Click the Single-Day tab. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . For this study. select Los Angeles. click . enter Summer Solstice. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice.Creating Solar Studies . You can create a still. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. expand Views (all). 4 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For the Single-Day solar study. and time range. MA. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 9 In the Name dialog. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. for City. click .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. CA. 10 Under Place. expand 3D Views. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. and time. or multi-day solar study. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . date. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. USA. For the Multi-Day solar study. USA is selected.Boston. Los Angeles.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Duplicate. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Under Frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 7 On the Options Bar. 2008. for Sun Position. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. click . 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. for Date. 6 On the View Control Bar. click OK. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Frame. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 8 On the Options Bar. Los Angeles is selected.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. and click OK. Los Angeles. enter 20 and press ENTER. enter 10 and press ENTER. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. and click OK. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. select June 22. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. 2008. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select December 22. click . verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. ■ For Time Interval. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 16 In the Name dialog. For Time Range. 14 In this case. and click OK.Courtyard View is currently displayed. enter Winter Solstice. 19 On the File menu. click Save. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. Clear Ground Plane at Level. confirm that Summer Solstice. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439.

Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. click Text. click . click . click To play the animation from start to finish. . 14 On the Options Bar. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. under Floor Plans.■ To display the next key frame. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. The solar study animation plays. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. and click OK. . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. on the Single-Day tab. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. for Sun Position. click . click OK. double-click 01 Entry. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. . select Summer Solstice. click To display the next sequential frame. Los Angeles. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. approximately as shown.

click . approximately as shown. On the Options Bar. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click Lines. as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. expand 3D Views. 8 For Sun Position. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click and enter Dining. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as shown. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 5 In the Project Browser. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 .

13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. ■ For Frames per second. On the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. on the Single-Day tab. 11 To display the section box. as shown. under Output Length. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. select the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. select Frame Range. and enter 5 to 50. 14 Click outside of the section box. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. click OK. 15 To hide the section box. if necessary. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . On the Annotation Categories tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. select Section Boxes. select Summer Solstice. verify that the value is set to 15.

for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . or frame.Los Angeles. For Frames per second. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select Winter Solstice. under Output Length. To maintain the proportions of the frame. enter 450 in the first field (width). verify that Hidden Line is selected. For Files of Type. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click OK. click . The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. click OK. For File Name. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select AVI Files. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. for Model Graphics Style. of the animation separately. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Frame Range. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. and click OK. Los Angeles. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that the value is set to 15. Click OK. For Dimensions.■ ■ Under Format. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. for Compressor. Under Format. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you open each image. To view the animation. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 2 On the View Control Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 For Sun Position. on the Single-Day tab.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and enter 5 to 10. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected.

depending on the Frame Range. click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Click OK. or any single-frame format. enter 450 in the first field (width). Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. BMP. 8 Click Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select PNG. For File name. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. In this example. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click the Desktop icon. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. such as JPEG.■ For Dimensions. TIFF. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. under 3D Views.Los Angeles. as shown: 9 On the File menu. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. For Files of Type. or GIF.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . as shown.2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . clear Section Boxes. specify 2:00 pm. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. click the Multi-Day tab. for Sun Position. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 5 Select the roof. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Time Interval. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click Duplicate.Boston. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.Week Interval. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar.Los Angeles . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. For Time. click OK. and click OK. and on the View Control Bar. USA. select One week. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. MA. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . for File name enter 2pm .

and click Save.West or North . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. When you mirror a project. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and annotations in non-drafting views. and click OK. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Click the Desktop icon. under Floor Plans. In the Length/Format dialog. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. double-click 01 Entry. you mirror all model elements. model views. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. for Compressor. click OK. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. such as East . click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off.South. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. for File Name. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 17 On the View Control Bar.

View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. and click OK. right-click. In this exercise. The project is mirrored along the East .3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. 2 In the drawing area.West axis. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. Then.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select East . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select the roof. 6 On the Standard toolbar.West. For additional information. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 In the warning dialog. under 3D Views. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view.

to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. click the Still tab. select Summer Solstice. and select Winter Solstice. For example. click . 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.3 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. Orienting to True North | 449 . click . change the time back to 12:00 PM. 11 For Sun Position. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click Apply. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. 12 Under Date and Time. 10 Under Date and Time. 8 For Sun Position. 5 For Sun Position. on the Still tab. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click . and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. and click OK. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. and click OK. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Floor Plans. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. the view settings must be set for True North. click the Still tab. click OK. and click Properties. 15 For Sun Position. 14 On the View Control Bar. right click 01 Entry. 19 In the Project Browser.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. for Orientation. When a project is started. select True North. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click . click OK. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. and select Winter Solstice. 18 In the Project Browser. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases).

as shown. click toward the top of the screen. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. The floor plan rotates in the view. Orienting to True North | 451 .■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.

right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. and click Element Properties. and click OK. right-click. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. right-click. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Summer Solstice. select True North. 28 In the Project Browser. for Orientation. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. select Project North. 33 For Sun Position. enter True North Orientation. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click the Still tab. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. select True North Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation. and click OK.23 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Apply. under 3D Views. 32 On the View Control Bar.

Click OK.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. enter 600 in the first field. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. For Files of Type. click Summer Solstice. In the Length/Format dialog. For File Name. click the Desktop icon. Click Save. click the Single-Day tab. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Orienting to True North | 453 . for Dimensions. click OK. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Los Angeles. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. for Compressor. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Format. and click OK. and click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected.

Under Lighting. for Setting. under Settings. select Winter Solstice. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. capturing it. and click Duplicate. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. and 2:00 PM. under 3D Views. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Rendered views do not have this limitation. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. For Sun. under Quality. In the Name dialog. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. select 12/22. In this exercise. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. and click OK. select Edit/New. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 3 On the View Control Bar.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. for Date and Time. (Show Rendering Dialog). 1 In the Project Browser. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. click Render. select Interior: Sun only. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. and click OK. and exporting it as a JPEG image. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. select Medium. Since a rendered image is temporary. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

verify that JPEG Files is selected. and click OK. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. click Desktop. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Export.6 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. click Save to Project. and click Save. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.

456 .

Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. elevations. an outside reviewer. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. length. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Co-house. sections. advanced model graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Other tools in the software. Using the pre-built building model. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you can choose between realism and stylistics. type. you explore the stylistic approach. In this series of exercises. linework. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. For the realistic approach. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. When organizing presentation graphics. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. and section boxes. and details. 457 . They include rendering. or the client. In this tutorial. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. however. a consultant.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial.

change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a copy of the plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click in the drawing area. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Cnst. right-click 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.rvt. Cnst. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. exit the menu.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. this represents the view getting smaller. and other annotations in this view. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and clear DOWN Text. No annotations display in the view.rvt. sections. dimensions. and Up Arrow. expand the Stairs category. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. navigate to the folder of your choice.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 In the Save As directory. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 8 Click OK. click the Scale control and select 1:100. and click Save. UP Text. 7 Under Visibility. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. This turns off the visibility of all tags. elevations. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Down Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab.

you can create. 9 For City. MA. select Cast Shadows.rvt. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. select Sun and Shadow Settings. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. click (Shadows Off). 6 Under Settings. for Date and Time. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. on the Still tab. click the Place tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 For Place. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. specify 35. Within a project. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. If you select a different city. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. the darker the shadows. and click OK. modify. 1:00 PM. click . Time and Place. click . This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. however. At that place. 12 Click OK. select Boston. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. double-click it in the Project Browser. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Cnst. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. ■ For Contrast. select By Date. specify 10/27. The higher the number. For Sun Position. you can select any city. 3 On the View Control Bar. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and select 1st Flr. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE For this step.

for Sun Position. under Settings. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. and click OK. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click to place it. The viewport displays at the cursor. click Modify. click Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not available. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . select Arch Portrait.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. and notice the view title. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown.

For this analytique. 12 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. for Show Title. and click OK. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. under Graphics. To accomplish this. select No. The viewport no longer displays a view title. click . 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. and click Activate View. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. enter Presentation. 9 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. and the boundary of the region. click Edit/New. 20 On the Options Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 22 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. fill properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. If necessary. 17 In the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click Region Properties. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 18 On the Options Bar. select Invisible lines. When you finish drawing the chain. and select Chain.

and click Deactivate View. for Fill Pattern. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet.24 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Solid Black. under Graphics. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 25 In the Name dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click OK. and click View Properties. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. click Finish Sketch. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. scroll down. enter Presentation. for Sheet Name. and click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. select Solid fill. 30 On the Design Bar. click . 35 Proceed with the next lesson. under Name. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. under Identity Data. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. right-click South. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt.

under Elevations. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 Under Shadow. select By Date. scroll up. expand the Doors category. under Visibility. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 2:30 PM. click (Shadows Off). under Visibility. and click Rename. exit the menu. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click . 13 For Contrast. clear Visible. on the Model Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Time and Place. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click in the drawing area. click Duplicate. click OK. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. specify 35. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 11 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Name dialog. click in the Walls row. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. under Pattern Overrides. 9 Click OK. enter Presentation South Elevation. select Cast Shadows. 18 For Time. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 14 For Sun Position. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK. right-click Copy of South. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. under Settings. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click Override. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.2 In the Project Browser.

and click Add View to Sheet. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. click Add View. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). double-click A105 .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469.rvt. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays.

click Modify. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471.

rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Section. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. select 1: 100. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Scale. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Cnst. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 3 On the Options Bar. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. 4 Add the section shown below.

for Scale. expand Sections (Callout 1). Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2.Section 2 is added to the building model. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. To fit correctly in the analytique. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. as shown. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . select 1 : 100. this view needs to be rotated 180°. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 7 On the Options Bar.

and clear Elevation Swing. enter Presentation Section 2. click the Model Categories tab. click in the Walls row. under Sections (Callout 1). scroll up. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. expand the Doors category.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click Override. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 17 Under Visibility. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. right-click Callout of Section 2. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. and click Rename. 15 Under Visibility. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Sections (Callout 1).

The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 Click OK.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. click The crop regions no longer display. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. When you select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. (Hide Crop Region). Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 22 On the View Control Bar.

you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. For Contrast. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. In addition. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. specify 35. ■ For Sun Position. The shadows do not offer much contrast. 3 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. click Duplicate. In the steps that follow. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . under Sections (Callout 1). in the Project Browser. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: Under Shadow. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view.

click OK. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. select Directly. For Altitude. Silhouette Edges. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . For Azimuth. click (Shadows On). was added to this training file for training purposes. specify 135°. and click OK. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 70°. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. select Silhouette Edges.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Select Relative to View. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE The line style. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. for Silhouette style. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Section 2. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View.Presentation.

To rotate an object. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view.5 In the Type Selector. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 9 On the Edit toolbar. select Viewport : Presentation. The section needs to be rotated 180°. The view title no longer displays. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. double-click Section 2. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 6 On the Design Bar. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. click (Rotate). In the steps that follow. Using a clock as a reference. under Sections (Callout 1). and press Enter. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you click to specify the start radius. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.

Presentation. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all).The callout rotates 180°. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click A105 .

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. After applying the view template to a new section view. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 .14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. click Modify. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.

and click OK. and click Rename. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 3 In the New View Template dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Type 1). 6 In the Project Browser. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. enter Presentation Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Section 1. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Copy of Section 1. and click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template. click OK. enter Presentation. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 4 In the View Templates dialog. under Sections (Type 1).

double-click A105 . under Graphics. select Presentation.Presentation. click Add View. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Activate View. and elevation swings no longer display. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 18 Right-click the viewport. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. under Sheets (all). lighting fixtures. under Names. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select 90° Counterclockwise. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click OK. 15 Right-click the viewport.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click Deactivate View. for Rotation on Sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. annotations. select Viewport : Presentation. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 14 In the Type Selector. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. The furniture.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. such as a tracery window or a column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 4 In the Project Browser. as shown. and click Rename. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. under Sections (Callout 1). After you add the callout. under Sections (Type 1). click Modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Section 1. select the callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 8 Right-click. as shown. enter Presentation Callout. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout. and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Annotation Crop. 7 Select the crop region.5 In the Rename View dialog. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. and click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser.

13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Scale Value 1. specify 22. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . click Add View. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Callout. and click Activate View. select Custom. Click OK.

you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and make adjustments as necessary. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. click Region Properties. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). In the steps that follow. and move it to the position shown below. click Filled Region. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. double-click Presentation Callout. click Edit/New.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. When finished. and click Deactivate View. activate the viewport. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. on the Design Bar. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. and click OK 3 times. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . under Sheets (all). click Filled Region. 28 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. for Fill Pattern. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. select Solid fill. and click Activate View.Presentation.25 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . click Finish Sketch.

and sketch the rectangle shown below. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 34 Select the crop region. click (Show Crop Region). click . 33 On the View Control Bar.31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 32 On the Design Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.35 On the View Control Bar. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Deactivate View. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . click (Hide Crop Region).

and click Advanced Model Graphics. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Isometric. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. under 3D Views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click 1 : 200. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Scale control. click (Shadows Off). 5 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and apply shadows to the views. 3 On the View Control Bar. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.

8 In the Name dialog. enter Isometric 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 15 In the Rename View dialog. For Azimuth. 13 In the Project Browser. select Directly. and click OK. select Section Box. click Duplicate. specify 45°. Select 1st Flr. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. and click Rename. under 3D Views. under Extents. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 135°. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . For Altitude. and click OK. for Silhouette style. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. For Contrast. Select Ground Plane at Level. specify 35. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. Select Relative to View. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. right-click Isometric. For Sun Position. select Cast Shadows. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. double-click Isometric 2. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. A section box displays around the building model. Cnst. click . in the list. enter Isometric 2.

These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. as shown. You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor.19 Select the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP Notice the rotation symbol. When you are finished. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box.

under 3D Views. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views.Presentation. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify on the Design Bar. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. double-click Isometric 3. 22 In the Project Browser. make a copy of the view. 24 In the Project Browser.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and click OK. under 3D Views. you can adjust the plane location. On the Annotation Categories tab. 25 To hide the section box. and click OK. If desired. and click OK. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . double-click A105 . right-click Copy of Isometric 2. the stairs and railings may display. clear Section Boxes. double-click Isometric 2. right-click Isometric 2. The section box no longer displays. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 27 Select the section box. under Sheets (all). In the Type Selector. enter Isometric 3. clear Section Boxes. 29 To hide the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 31 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. Next. and click Rename.

drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. 33 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. In the Type Selector.

click Region Properties. select Transparent. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. for Fill Patterns. select Concrete. 42 Using the drawing tools. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 39 For Background. 41 On the Design Bar. 40 Click OK twice. On the Options Bar. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 36 On the Design Bar. click Edit.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. This will make it easier to draw lines. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. and click Activate View. click Lines. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Edit/New. 35 Select the poche filled region.

48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Deactivate View. for Fill Pattern.43 On the Design Bar. 46 Click OK twice. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Solid fill. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. click Region Properties. 47 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Finish Sketch. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

The view opens immediately. under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. then you specify the eye direction and range. you create the final view for the analytique. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. you add it to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Camera. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. a cutaway perspective view. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 .

specify 35. For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click OK. For Contrast. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. for Silhouette style. click .4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). for Name. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. select Section Box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . A section box now cuts through the building model. under Extents.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. 12 Select the section box.

502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). In the Type Selector.Presentation. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Under Model Crop Size. double-click A105 . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK.14 Select the crop region. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. enter 165 mm. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. you must specify the actual size of the image. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. for Width. under Change. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 19 To hide the section box. 21 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. click Size. clear Section Boxes. select Scale (locked proportions). Because scale does not apply to perspective views.

select the same font as the title.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. enter Description. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and click OK. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 40 mm. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. select Text : Title. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Annotating the Analytique | 503 .rvt.Presentation sheet is not the active view. click Edit/New. under Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select a font. under Text. 10 In the Name dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Text. 6 In the Name dialog. enter Title. click OK. specify a text size of 6 mm.

click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 On the Design Bar.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

507 . curtain walls. that compose the building.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. and roofs. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. Once the model has been imported. you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you can easily add detail with Revit components. such as walls. After you import the SketchUp model. In this tutorial.

under Template file. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. and not in the library. enter SketchUp Model.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rte. click Browse.skp. select SketchUp Files. click the Massing tab. click OK. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. select All. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . For Files of type. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. visible elements. For Import units. enter Import SketchUp. you create a Revit Architecture project. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. buildings. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 10 In the Name dialog. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. or select from a list. Double-click the Common folder. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and click OK. select Preserve. click Create Mass. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click Save. 6 In the Save As dialog. For Layers. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. For Colors. Click the Sketchup file. for File name. click OK. 9 In the informational dialog. select Auto-Detect. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.

Level 1 is the only choice. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . select Level 1. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. In a new project. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. Click Open.Center.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. such as walls. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. For Place at level. 14 On the View toolbar. select Manual . depending on the complexity of the project. curtain walls. 16 On the Design Bar. click the Close button. click . ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. click Finish Mass. 17 In the warning dialog. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. ■ ■ For Positioning. and roofs.

curtain walls. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. After you create the building from the mass faces. such as walls. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. for Level. click Roof by Face.400mm displays. and roofs. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. that compose the building. select the face so that it highlights in red. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project.18 Proceed to the next exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify Basic Roof: Generic . Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. verify Level 2 is selected. 3 In the Type Selector. and on the View Control Bar.

indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. on the Options Bar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. To see the new roof. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. A roof is created from the mass face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click to display masses. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click Create Roof. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. on the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view.

13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 12 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

for Loc Line. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click Modify to end the command. 22 In the Type Selector. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 .200mm displays. click Wall by Face. verify Basic Wall: Generic . select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 21 On the Design Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click roofs that you created.15 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

click Curtain System by Face. 28 In the Type Selector. 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click to view only the walls and roofs.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass.

32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 31 Using the same technique. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.30 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.

Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. select the other wall. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof. click Create System. and select it.35 On the Design Bar. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Roof by Face. click Wall by Face. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Curtain System.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 .Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. specify a point to place the camera. click Camera. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 42 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. and select the mass face shown below. double-click Level 1. Below the right corner of the view. click to view the building that you have created. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. 43 Click to redisplay the masses.

48 On the View toolbar. as shown. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. roofs. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The perspective view created by the camera displays. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. click your building in the view. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. Click the frame to display its grips. to view only the walls. specify a point for the camera target.

Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. 50 On the Options Bar. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. Click OK.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Center. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and select the left curtain system in the view. click . for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . select Center.

59 On the View toolbar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. 56 In the Project Browser. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and move the roof edges as shown below. and click Cancel to end the command. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. double-click {3D}. click Door.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 55 Right-click. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 63 In the Type Selector.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Like walls. Unlike windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. and you can change these elements individually. click Training Files. or you can use a specific curtain system command. to resize the system. panel. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. This affects the entire curtain system. and they are not windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. you need to change the length of the wall. To switch panel types. To change grids. you select the grid. you need to select a panel. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. grid lines. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. 525 . you create a curtain system using the wall command. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. For example. and mullions. Like windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. click Wall. and double-click Ground Floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

8 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and double-click Southeast Isometric.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 527 .

Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties). and room bounding. top constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. enter 1200. For Top Offset. using curtain grids. top and base attachments. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel.11 Select the curtain system.

23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. right-click Elevation 1 . 25 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. and resize the crop boundary as shown. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. click Elevation. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. click Curtain Grid. Creating an Entrance | 529 .a. and click OK. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click Rename. click Modify.

31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Modify. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 33 On the Design Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid. and click OK. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. THIRD FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Curtain Grid. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FOURTH FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels.26 While pressing CTRL. while pressing CTRL. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. SIXTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. one larger than the other. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. and SEVENTH FLOOR.

click Add or Remove Segments. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. The two segments are removed. and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Creating an Entrance | 531 .Next. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. The segment line style changes to dashed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.

remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. and lock them. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid. 42 Place dimensions as shown. select One Segment.38 Using the same method. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar.

You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Use the following image as a guide. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 43 Delete the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click in any white space to exit the editor.

Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 55 In the Project Browser. . click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 56 In the Project Browser. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. Now. 54 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. under Elevations.rfa. under Floor Plans. click Modify. on the new curtain system you added. They are part of the curtain panel category.Next. 52 On the Type Selector. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. This changes the graphics style of the Next. click view. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. and click Wireframe. double-click Entrance Elevation. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. These panels schedule as doors. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click Training Files. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. not as curtain panels. 57 On the View Control Bar. The panel changes to a double door.

66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 65 On the View Control Bar.60 On the Type Selector. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click System Panel : Solid. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panels display in blue. 63 Click OK twice. and the solid panels display in white. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . click . 61 With the panel still selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Entire Grid Line. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select Grid Line Segment. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. click Mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. click Save As. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.68 On the File menu. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 4 On the Options Bar.

so you remove them next. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. You are going to change some mullion joins. however. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors. clickModify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . there are a few that you do not want. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.6 On the Options Bar. 10 Delete the mullions below them. select All Empty Segments. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.

The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Modify. 14 Click the top mullion control. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 15 On the Design Bar. you can also right-click.Two mullion join controls display. 16 In the Project Browser. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. double-click Southeast Isometric. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Finally. 17 Save the file. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels.

4 In the Type Selector. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. for Top Constraint. For Top Offset. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. (Arc passing through three points). Curved Curtain System | 539 . You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. under Floor Plans. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. you add a curtain system using the wall command.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Finally. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 7 On the Options Bar. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. enter 1200. Click OK. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed.

you place grids on the system. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. and then sixteenths. You are going to use one of these snaps points. under Elevations. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. double-click East. click Curtain Grid. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. eighths. Divide the halves into quarters. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Next. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click.

you change some panels in the system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. select the bottom layer of panels. Next. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.300mm. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 16 On the Design Bar. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. select Basic Wall: Generic . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector.

clear Chain. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. select Glass. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. enter 100.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Finish Sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK.rft. 9 Select the extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. click . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. for Depth. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. under Elevations. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Model Lines. and click . double-click Exterior. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

All fourth floor panels are selected. (SteeringWheels). 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.14 On the Design Bar.Pattern.rfa.Pattern. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Pattern. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click (Default 3D View). 24 On the View toolbar. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Floor Plans. and return to the project file. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 Right-click. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . and click Change Walls Orientation. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.rfa family. select Curtain Panel . 21 In the Type Selector. click 25 On the View toolbar.

select System Panel . 29 In the Type Selector. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 30 Save the file. All fifth floor panels are selected. right-click. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the solid panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.Solid. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 27 In the Project Browser.

3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 8 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Select Radius. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. under Elevations. Click again to specify the ending point. and click OK. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . . For vertical mullions.rft. select Mullion. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. for Profile Usage. click Training Files. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. enter 8. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ For Sides. double-click East. and select it.

rfa. clear Coarse and Medium. After the new profile is loaded. 31 Click . 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. 28 On the View toolbar. 20 Select the detail component. and click Visibility. click Mullion. 17 On the Design Bar.11 On the Design Bar. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Training Files. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. and click OK. under 3D Views. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. click Detail Component.detail. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . it can be added as a mullion type. clear Fine. 27 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Visibility. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and return to the project file.rfa family. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.rfa. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels).

43 Press DELETE. so you remove the unwanted ones. 33 Click Edit/New. under Floor Plans. 40 On the Design Bar. select Circular Mullion for Family. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. You have placed more mullions than you want. and click OK. right-click. 36 Under Construction. click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 41 In the Project Browser. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select All Empty Segments. for Profile. click Duplicate. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK twice. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 44 Save the file. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 .

4 On the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. and you can click to select them all. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 5 On the Options Bar. In this lesson. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 1 In the Project Browser. All the inside faces highlight. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. a storefront system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and a ruled curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. double-click TOP OF ROOF. select Defines slope.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. and press TAB. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.

15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 600. double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Mullion. Click OK. click Modify. Sloped Glazings | 549 . under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select Entire Grid Line. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Roof Properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Zoom in to the skylight.

2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. under Floor Plans. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.Storefront System In this exercise. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 In the Type Selector. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. click Wall. 5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. and enter 2400. select Unconnected for Height. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. 12 Select the storefront wall. enter 10200 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 9 On the Design Bar. Storefront System | 551 . For this wall. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. click Modify. under 3D Views. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. even if the wall height changes. which is specified in the type. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 8 Click the temporary dimension. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. and press ENTER. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. and click . The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout.

Under Vertical Grid Pattern. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. center. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. you find Number. or end. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. double-click Southeast Isometric. By setting the Angle value. 16 Click OK. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Angle. In this exercise. 19 Select a curtain grid. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. click Mullion. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. see the Revit Architecture help. under 3D Views. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 18 On the Options Bar. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. enter 15. and Offset. Justification. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 20 Save the file. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. select All Empty Segments. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 6 Click the highlighted line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and highlight the model line.

and click . click Curtain Grid. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 11 Click OK. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 10 Select the panel. 9 On the Design Bar. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.8 Select the highlighted line. click Modify. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

Finally. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and then eighths. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. right-click. and define a ruled curtain system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 16 In the Type Selector. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. quarters. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 18 Save the file. and then eighths. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. select System Panel : Solid. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves.

556 .

including hip. and low sloped roofs. In this tutorial. 557 . In this lesson. you learn to create several different types of roofs. Before you can sketch the roof profile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Roofs.rvt. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. click Training Files. mansard. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you learn how to add fascia. gable. shed. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In addition.Roofs 15 In this lesson. and soffits to the roofs that you create. In this exercise. gutters. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009.

4 Click OK. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Ref Plane. expand Floor Plans. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. select Name. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Go To View dialog. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. click the blue square on the witness line. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and click OK. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. centerline. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. and so on). click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. expand Views (all).

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .

Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Lines.Next. select Chain. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

expand Views (all). The roof should resemble the following illustration. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. press CTRL. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and then select the exterior face of the wall. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Section 1. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select the second wall. expand Sections (Type 1). 21 In the Project Browser. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). press TAB. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click Modify. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 .Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Next. 18 Select the edge of the roof.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.24 On the Options Bar. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 26 On the View toolbar.

6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Pick Walls. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . expand Floor Plans. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Next. and enter 600 for Overhang. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). sketch the roof footprint.rvt. and click Yes. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 3 In the Project Browser. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. m_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Garage Roof. verify that Defines slope is selected. 5 On the Options Bar.

click Finish Roof. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 15 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. select both slope definition lines. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. clear Defines slope. under Dimensions. By default. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click (Properties). 13 On the Design Bar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. and click OK. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click the model. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. Next. 11 Press CTRL. click Modify. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.

m_Roofs. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. When you complete the roof. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. expand Views (all). After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. clear Defines slope. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. press TAB. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. click Pick Walls.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 .

sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.6 Click to select all the walls. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. click Modify. add new slope lines to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click (Rectangle). 8 On the Options Bar. Next. 9 Using automatic snaps. 17 When you see the informational dialog. sketch the chimney opening. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Finish Roof. Next. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the View menu. select Defines Slope. 15 On the Options bar. select Defines Slope.

click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser.18 On the View toolbar. select Defines slope. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. using the following illustration for guidance. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. close the roof sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. clear Defines Slope. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical slope definition line.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. and click (Pick Lines). click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Next. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.

The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 16 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . and click OK. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Finish Roof. click Roof Properties. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Next. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 17 On the View toolbar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 14 Under Constraints. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Next. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.21 Click (SteeringWheels). 23 On the Tools toolbar.

and double-click Level 2. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click (Trim/Extend).rvt. 9 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. press TAB. 4 On the Options Bar.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. enter 0 for Overhang. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. expand Floor Plans. select the left vertical roof line. Next. and enter 300 for Overhang. clear Defines Slope. m_Roofs. 10 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. expand Views (all). 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way.

click Roof Properties. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. and double-click 3D. and press ENTER. 16 Under Constraints.rvt. and click OK. expand Views (all). you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 On the View toolbar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. select Defines slope. Next. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click 20 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. (SteeringWheels). enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add a slope-defining line. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click Modify. m_Roofs. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.

14 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click (Pick Lines). 7 On the Options Bar. you need to add two reference planes. 11 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Before you can add slope arrows. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Next. expand Floor Plans. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. To help locate the position of each split. click Slope Arrow. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . Next. expand Views (all). click Modify. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 5 On the View menu. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and double-click Level 2. 9 On the Tools menu. and enter 600 for Offset. click Split Walls and Lines. 12 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. add two new slope arrows. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 3 On the Options Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.

1 In the Project Browser. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. and then click OK. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. (Properties). When eave heights differ. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and move the cursor to place the arrow. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. expand Views (all). select Slope for Specify.15 to add the second slope arrow. 16 Repeat steps 13 . use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. and click 19 Under Constraints.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. enter 500 for Rise/1000. click Modify. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Roofs. 20 Under Dimensions. 3 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. expand Floor Plans. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. and double-click Garage Roof. When you sketch a hip roof. select both slope arrows.

select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. on the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. Next. select Defines Slope. (Properties).4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). on the File menu. 5 On the Options Bar. click Align Eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. select a method to align the eaves. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click Finish Roof. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. When aligning eaves. under Dimensions. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK. 14 If you want to save your changes. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. on the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. click Modify. click Training Files. expand Elevations. 3 Select the roof and. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. expand Views (all). 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. and double-click North. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. under Constraints. (Properties). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. expand Views (all). click Lines. 7 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click . click Finish Roof. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. expand Floor Plans. under Dimensions. click (Pick Lines). 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and select the remaining three lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Level 3. and then select Defines slope. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.6 On the View toolbar.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.rvt. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. you add a roof to a building shell. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. After you add the roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name.17 On the View toolbar. click mansard roof. click Save As. click Training Files. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. under Floor Plans. 5 In the drawing area.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. double-click Roof.

select Steel Truss . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. click Roof Properties. 11 On the Design Bar.Because the walls are not continuous. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. for Type. click (Trim/Extend). and click OK. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch.Insulation on Metal Deck . 7 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Roof.EPDM. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

16 On the Options Bar. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. under Floor Plans. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. The roof has been created. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. double-click the section head to open the section view. click (Draw Split Lines). double-click Roof. In the next steps. and click to select it. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 .

582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and select a point on the opposite roof line. 20 Using the same method. 18 Move the cursor down. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left.

Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . (Add points). Next. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. click (Modify Sub-Elements). on the Options Bar.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. In this exercise. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. You modify the points individually. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected.

584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. click (Modify Sub-Elements). The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for the dimension.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. enter -2''. 25 Using the same method.

27 Press and hold CTRL. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. and press ENTER. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 29 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. including the interior edges of the roof regions. 31 Select the roof slab. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. click (Properties). and select all of the roof edges. enter 4''. for Elevation. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar.

You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. and soffits. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. under Construction. you can easily create its fascia. and Soffits on page 586. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. Gutters. 35 Click OK 3 times. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Fascia. for the Thermal/Air Layer. By making the insulation layer variable. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 39 Proceed to the next lesson. In some cases this type of slope is desired. Gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. gutters. click Edit. select Variable. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 36 View the results in the section view. Creating Fascia. and Soffits In this lesson. on the File menu. gutters. click Edit/New. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. The entire slab is sloped. click Save As. After you create a roof.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 If you want to save your changes. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. for Structure. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof.

and click Open. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK twice. and open Common\c_Condominium. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Construction. click Duplicate. and click OK. click (Properties). click Training Files.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 3 Press CTRL.rvt. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 8 In the Name dialog. click Training Files.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. enter Built-up Fascia. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 2 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 13 On the Design Bar.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click (Properties). 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating Gutters In this exercise. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters on page 588. c_Condominium.

6 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. and click OK. Creating Soffits on page 590.3 In the Properties dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. . 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK three times. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. Creating Gutters | 589 . under Construction. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.

1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. c_Condominium.Creating Soffits In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. click Pick Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.rvt. expand Floor Plans. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

8 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them.4 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu. Creating Soffits | 591 . expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. click Join Geometry. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.

click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes.

You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Units dialog. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. click Project Units. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. your values will be different. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. In the final exercise. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. 3 Under Area. Finally. and open Common\c_Area.rvt. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click Training Files.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. select Millimeters. If you are using metric units. select mm. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 593 . You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. select Square meters. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. under Length. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. For Unit Suffix. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.

■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. the system-computed height defaults to the level. it is not necessary in this exercise. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. click the Room Calculations tab. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. right-click in the Design Bar. click Settings. click the Area Schemes tab. or 0. select 2 decimal places. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. expand Views (all). and click Room and Area. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. For Unit Suffix. 4 In the Project Units dialog. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. Click OK. These schemes define spatial relationships. select m2. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. 9 Click Cancel. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. click OK. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme.

15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. under Views (all). 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. 12 When the informational dialog displays. If you select No. you must select one of the reference lines. When you select Yes in this dialog. click Area Plan. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. rather than the area tag. forming a closed loop. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. Click OK. click Area. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. To modify the area. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. you must manually add these boundary lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 13 In the Project Browser.

21 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. you create a new area plan for rentable space. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. If you do not select this option. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. When you pick the walls. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and store area. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Click OK. Next. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. you can either draw them or pick them. click Area Boundary. When you add area boundary lines. common areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click Area Plan. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings.

25 On the Design Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. and click to select the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar.23 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Area. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click Modify. Select Office area for Area Type.

■ Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 29 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. click Modify and select the area. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. click Area. click ■ ■ ■ . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. enter Core for Name.■ Click OK. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.

rvt. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 37 On the File menu. name the project Area-in progress. and click to place the legend.Notice that within the two store areas. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. In the next exercise. and click Save. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. click Save. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Color Scheme Legend.

5 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Under Available fields. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. under Category. select Area Type and click Add. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . click Schedule/Quantities.3 When the dialog displays. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Areas (Rentable). click the Fields tab.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

building elements. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floor. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. volume. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. At any time. After creating mass floors. roofs. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You assign the default wall. curtain systems. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can specify the view to display massing elements. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. If you modify a massing face. and floors. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. and roofs. or both. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you then need to update the building face. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. After you make building elements. 603 . In this tutorial. floors. and perimeter information. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Level 1. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 5 On the Design Bar. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. sweeps. click Create Mass. under Floor Plans.rvt. under Views (all). click Training Files. The Design Bar title changes to Mass.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and click Massing. and cutting geometry. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 25000. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click . under Constraints. 8 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. under Views (all). click Lines. select Mass (Opaque). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. for Name. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. double-click Level 1. enter 1550 mm. click Finish Sketch. (Line). under Materials and Finishes. click (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. and click OK. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click 18 On the Options Bar. for Extrusion End. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 15 On the View Control Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. (Pick Lines). click Extrusion Properties. 13 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Materials dialog. for Offset. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click OK. select Pick a plane. 21 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click the value for Material. and click OK. for Extrusion Start.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. The second form is on top of the first form. 30 In the drawing area. for Extrusion End. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. 28 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. enter 25000. highlight the larger form. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 27500. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP If necessary. double-click West. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). select Mass (Transparent). under Constraints. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click . under Views (all). 26 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to see the results. for Name. 23 In the Materials dialog. press TAB to highlight the entire face.

34 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click (Draw). you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. and clear Chain. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.31 Click to select the face. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. and on the Options Bar. (Pick Lines). Next. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . click (Arc passing through three points). 37 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown.

40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. double-click East. (Line). and delete the vertical construction line.TIP If you do not see this option. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Modify. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 46 On the Design Bar. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. under Views (all). 39 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). click Lines and. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. on the Options Bar. click Edit Top.

Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 .48 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 50 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. In this exercise. 53 On the View toolbar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. click 49 Create an arc as shown. click Blend Properties. for Material. (Arc passing through three points). 52 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). 51 In the Element Properties dialog.

select the mass. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 7 Using the same technique. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 2 In the drawing area. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. as shown.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 4 On the Options bar. click (Line). under Views (all). and select Chain. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.rvt. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. m_Massing_Start. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Lines.

click Extrusion Properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 17 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. 14 Under Constraints. Using Swept Blends | 611 . for Extrusion End. snap the corners to the intersections. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click Finish Sketch. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. When sketching each extrusion. 15 Click OK. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click (Default 3D View). and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. enter 0. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 16 On the Design Bar. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. on the View Control Bar.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. and click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select a point below the mass elements. 4 On the Options Bar. m_Massing_Start. double-click Level 1.rvt. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). under Floor Plans. click Sketch 2D Path. ■ For the radius.

click Lines. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. The only way to align these elements is visually. Using Swept Blends | 613 . 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Profile 1. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 10 On the Design Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click (Default 3D View). as shown. click Finish Path. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. and click Edit. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend.

13 On the Tools toolbar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Finish Profile. click Profile 2. 15 On the Design Bar. click (Align). Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . 17 Using the same method. and press ESC. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc.

and click . click <By Category>. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Profile. under Materials and Finishes. click Swept Blend Properties. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. click Finish Swept Blend. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent).

Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. click Finish Mass. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.24 On the Design Bar.rvt. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Finally. you create new family types from a mass family file. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. In this exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You then load that mass family file and others into a project.

for Height. enter 9000 mm. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 46000mm. for Depth. under Other. click Family Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Depth. for Height. and click OK. and for Name. enter 68000 mm. enter 15000mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and for Name. In this exercise. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Training Files. enter 6000 mm.rfa. 3 In the Name dialog. 8 For Width. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Apply. click New. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 9 Click OK. for Depth. and click Apply. for Height.rfa. 6 For Width. enter 18000 mm. 7 Click New. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 12000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 18000 mm. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . enter 11000 mm. and click OK. 5 Click New. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. for Width.

5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Views (all). click Place Mass. 1 If not already selected. on the View toolbar. 8 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 6 Open the Box-Training. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Semi Barrel Vault.rfa. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. Arc Dome. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. and Triangle.rvt. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click Training Files. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 On the View Control Bar. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.rfa. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rfa. under Floor Plans. You also load other existing mass families and place them. as shown.rfa family files.

20 In the Type Selector. click Modify.10 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click (Element Properties). enter 90 for Angle. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. and click to place the mass. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the drawing area. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . and click OK twice. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. for the Material parameter. select the 3 boxes. 11 Select the box. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Modify. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click (Element Properties). select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 21 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. select the triangle. 17 Press CTRL. select Rotate after placement. 16 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. specify Mass (Opaque). 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. and click OK twice.

and click OK twice. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. for the Material parameter. click (Default 3D View). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Opaque).26 Select the triangle. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 33 On the View toolbar. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). click Place Mass. 29 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent).

(Join Geometry). the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. NOTE When you join geometry. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.rvt file. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.

double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Views (all). on the Edit toolbar. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click (Mirror). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click (Default 3D View). 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. enter SM. click (Draw). click 14 On the Tools toolbar. as shown. and then select the triangle. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. for Axis. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box.8 On the Options Bar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. (Join Geometry). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 17 Press ESC to see the result.

rvt. click (Add to Design Option Set). you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click Modify. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. (If Design Options is already selected. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 1 On the Design Bar. you joined mass elements together. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 2 On the Window menu.In this exercise. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. and select the triangle mass element. do not clear the check mark.

select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Rotate after placement. and click OK. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click Place Mass. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. for Angle. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 90. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 17 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type Selector. specify Mass (Transparent). 14 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. select Sloped (primary). Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . click Place Mass. click Modify. under Views (all). clear Curved. 10 On the Options Bar. for the Material parameter.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click OK twice.

double-click North. 28 In the Project Browser. 23 On the View Control Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). click (Add to Design Option Set). and watch the status bar. select the three arc domes. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. click Modify. TIP To find the correct shapes. 22 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. under Elevations. for the Material parameter. under Views (all). select Curved. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click {3D}. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. and click (Element Properties). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. While pressing CTRL. under 3D Views. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. clear Sloped.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and click OK twice. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar.

you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click the Design Options tab.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Design Options). You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. you placed mass elements into Design Options. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 34 Close the warning that displays. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . and click Close. In this exercise. you can make it the primary option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Make Primary. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 31 Click the value for Design Option. select Curved and. under Option. 35 On the File menu. and click OK.

select Wall Centerline. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Brick on CMU. 5 In the Type Selector. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall by Face. 2 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. and for Loc Line. 6 On the Options Bar. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click (Pick Faces). 1 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create walls. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. under Views (all). click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise.

under Views (all). click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 15 On the Design Bar.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. double-click Level 5. double-click Level 3. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. click Wall by Face. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 9 On the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.

and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. under Views (all). You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . If desired. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 21 On the Design Bar. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 20 On the View Control Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. double-click Level 9. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

In this exercise. under Views (all). click Mass Floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 3 On the Model Categories tab. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 4 Click OK. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.rvt. clear Curtain Panels. double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. and exterior surface area. perimeter. When you select levels. select all levels. 8 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . volume. click Modify. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Curtain Systems. and Walls.

10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Mass Floors. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Levels 1-4. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar.

select Level 1. 15 Press CTRL. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. click Mass Floors. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown.14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. and click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 .

In this exercise. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.rvt. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and select Level. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. press and hold SHIFT. under Available fields. The Floor Area. 4 Using the same method. schedules can be created using the mass floors. select Mass Floor. under Category. Floor Perimeter. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Add. and click OK. select Floor Area. Floor Volume. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing .

6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . for Usage. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. select Mass: Family and Type. enter Retail. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. for Sort by. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. and click OK. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries.

and click Properties. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. After you assign usage. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 13 With Usage selected. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 14 Select Level. click Edit. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. under Scheduled fields (in order). select Mass: Family and Type.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. under Other. and click Remove. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.

23 In the Rename View dialog. 27 Click OK twice. elevation. and plan views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Then by. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 16 On the Formatting tab.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Usage. click Edit. 24 In the Project Browser. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Field formatting. under Other. for Filter by. for Sort by. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. in the field under Filter by. for Filter. under Other. select Calculate totals. and select Grand totals. select Usage. under Fields. 22 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Filter tab. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Level. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. and in the field below. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. click Edit. select Floor Area. and click OK. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . enter Hotel. and click Properties. and click Rename. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser.

click Roof by Face. floor perimeter. double-click {3D}. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all). the floor area. The mass floor schedules list. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you created mass floor schedules. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model.rvt. by level. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . you pick massing faces to create roofs.

7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof.400mm. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . Your model should now look as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.4 In the Type Selector.

Curtain Systems. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 15 Click the Model Categories tab. select Sloped Glazing. select Curtain Panels. In this exercise. and click OK. and Walls. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.8 Using the method you just learned. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. click Create Roof. in the Type Selector. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 13 Using the same method.

5 Press CTRL. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. click Curtain System by Face. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. double-click {3D}. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Create System. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.

select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .

11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).9 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt.

clear Exclude Design Options. and then click OK. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. and click (Element Properties). under Floor Plans. Roofs. and Walls. under Views (all). 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. for Width. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Floors. Curtain Systems.1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. enter 30000. Next. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . click Visibility/Graphics. clear Curtain Panels. 2 On the View menu. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. 4 Select the box mass family as shown.

The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). In the next steps.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans.

click OK. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click Remake. click (Default 3D View).TIP To select the curtain wall. 14 On the Options Bar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. Also. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 Select the roof as shown.

and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

1 Open the 3D view. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.rvt. you changed the size of an existing mass family. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. under Schedules/Quantities. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

click All to select all categories. 9 Select Mass. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. right-click {3D}. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click OK. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . under 3D Views.The 3D view now shows only the building shell.Massing only. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Rename the view 3D .

to the building shell.In this exercise. You might create the model shown. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. If desired. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . This concludes the massing tutorial.

652 .

In another exercise. place. you not only simplify their placement. the host group is also updated automatically. By grouping objects. and typical office layouts. or with those working on a different project. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also nest groups within other groups. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. After you create a model group. You mirror one instance of the group. When you make changes to a nested group. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you add the new model group to a previously created group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you also simplify the modification process. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 653 . In this tutorial. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. For example. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and modify repetitive units. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. hotel rooms. The new group is considered nested within the host group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Modifying. Creating. all instances in the building model are updated. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects.

click Training Files. enter ZR. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click First Floor.rvt. 2 Click in the drawing area.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . click (Group).

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

under Groups. and click Create Instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify. expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 .Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Mirror).

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate).

click Modify. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and one rotated. as shown.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar. one mirrored. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

click Save As. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click to select it. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. press TAB to highlight the wall. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.rvt. Modifying a Group | 661 . and click Save. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

NOTE To display an excluded element. and click member to group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB.). select the element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. press TAB.).3 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door.).). 8 On the Design Bar.

move the cursor to the left.127mm. 13 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. click Wall.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. Modifying a Group | 663 . 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Door. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Modify. 10 In the Type Selector.

The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Modify. click Edit Group. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . In edit group mode. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 23 In the drawing area. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor up. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.17 On the Design Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.

click Modify. and click OK. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Nesting Groups | 665 . and the wall and folding doors for the closet.25 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. (Element Properties). for Unconnected Height. Nesting Groups In this exercise. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1000. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 26 Select the opening. 29 On the group editor toolbar. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. and on the Options Bar. enter 2134. click 28 For Base Offset. click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. created in an earlier lesson. which acts as the host.

double-click First Floor. 5 In the drawing area. click Edit Group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.rvt. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group. in the Project Browser. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Add to Group). m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.

Nesting Groups | 667 . and each of the bifold doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB.

and filled regions. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. such as text.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click First Floor. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. In the next exercise. you add door tags to a group.rvt. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as door and window tags. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.

7 On the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click Filled Region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors.

and select the text note and the filled region. click (Group). 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Text. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and on the Design Bar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click to add an arc leader. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 16 In the drawing area. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile.

expand Detail. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. double-click Second Floor. and click Create Instance. Because the detail group contains variables. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 .18 On the Design Bar. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Modify. 21 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. under Groups. 20 In the Project Browser. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Leader. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. under Floor Plans.manner that a drawing component can be added. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. as shown. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.

for Attached Detail Group Name. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 11 In the Project Browser. click Check None. select Door Tags. and click OK. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. double-click Second Floor. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click (Group).7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Filter dialog.

15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. therefore. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. When you load the group from the library into a new project. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 14 On the Options Bar. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Place Detail. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit.

12 On the Design Bar. under Groups\Model. and click Create Instance. and expand Model. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Save. click Desktop. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). accept the default template file. click OK. In this case. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.rvt.rvt. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 In the New Project dialog. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Open. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . select 2 Bedroom Unit. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. for Create new. and click OK. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 3 For File name. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. expand Groups. verify that Project is selected. and click Save Group. A warning dialog displays. browse to the Desktop. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

click Modify. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Remove Link. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Link. verify that Attached Details is selected only. and click OK. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 17 On the Design Bar. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 18 In the Project Browser. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. When a group is converted to a link. and the link is removed. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Use Existing. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click OK. 24 In the message dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. expand Revit Links. 20 On the Options Bar.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Bind.rvt. select the linked Revit model. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. and on the Options Bar.

Site 19 In this tutorial. you add a building pad to the site. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. In the final exercises. convert the data to a table. You add property lines manually. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways. 677 . islands. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and then modify the data. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. Using Site Tools In this lesson.

you create a toposurface using two different methods. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_First_Project. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 3 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. right-click in the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. This project file was created using the default metric template.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. click Point. expand Floor Plans. Using the first method. and click Site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. click Toposurface.rvt. and double-click Site. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Use the following illustration as a reference.

under Increment. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12 On the Settings menu. 15000mm. under Additional Contours. enter 1500mm. click Site Settings. click Finish Surface. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12000mm. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 11 On the Design Bar.8 On the Options Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. and click OK. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.

14 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). under Views (all). click the elevation value.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. modify the level names and elevations. 16 On the View toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. enter 1000mm. Before importing the contour data. click to delete it. and double-click South. and press ENTER. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 19 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 18 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click to view it at various angles. click Modify. 15 On the View Control Bar.

and press ENTER. 23 Click the Level 1 text. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Yes. click Pin Position. click Training Files. 28 On the Design Bar. Until it is exploded. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. select Specify. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. rename the level Basement. 30 On the Edit menu. select Preserve. and click OK. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 682 | Chapter 19 Site .21 Click the Level 2 text. 24 In the Project Browser. 29 Select the imported topography. Click Open. click Modify. it is considered an import symbol. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. For Layers. rename the level Base Site Elevation. double-click Site. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. For Colors. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views.

Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. When you select the import symbol. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. when the edges highlight. clear Elevations. 34 Under Visibility. select it. and click OK. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Modify. 36 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click Toposurface. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. clear C_INDX. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 32 On the View menu.31 On the Design Bar. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance.

Using the first method. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . name the project Site-in progress. 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Using the second method. you add property lines using two methods. click (SteeringWheels). you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. this project file is required in its current state. click (Default 3D View). 40 On the View toolbar. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. and click Save.rvt. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 39 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click Finish Surface.

Click Modify. select Create property lines by sketching. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Property Line. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. double-click Site. and click OK. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Select and delete the right vertical line. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. do so before continuing. Adding Property Lines | 685 . click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Site-in progress. click Lines. On the Design Bar.

NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. on the Standard toolbar. when they highlight. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. add an arc line on the right. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. to delete them. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select the lines. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click Property Line. and click OK. click OK. click OK. click Finish Sketch. A warning dialog is displayed. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. select Edit Table. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.

click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This means there is no gap in the property lines. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 16 Click OK. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. If the gap is not closed. click to place the property lines. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 15 Starting in Row #1. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 19 In the Tags dialog.

31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 30 On the View Control Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. and click OK. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. right-click in the Design Bar.dwg and click OK. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In the next exercise. 27 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click Visibility/Graphics. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . In this exercise. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. you created two sets of property lines. In the final step. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 25 Under Visibility. click to place it. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 23 On the View menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689.20 Click Load.rfa. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. and click Drafting. The tags display more prominently in this view. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. Before adding property line segment tags. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Imported Categories tab.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Site-in progress. Under Subcategory.0mm. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. enter the name Working Contour. 7 Click OK. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. select Working Contour. In the Object Styles dialog. click New. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. select Topography. under Contour Line Display. Under Line Pattern. select Single Value. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. click Site Settings. and click OK. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . 10 Under Additional Contours. Under Line Color. enter 1000. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Under Range Type. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. click Object Styles. 9 In the Site Settings dialog.rvt. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. select a shade of Brown.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. for Subcategory. select Dash dot. 2 On the Settings menu.

You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. The next exercise requires a new training file. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. In the next exercise. Working Contour. Click Yes when prompted to save changes.11 Click OK. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. and islands. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create topographic subregions to define roads. The object style subcategory. you create subregions in order to define roads. and islands. such as material. parking areas. In this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces.

rvt. and open Metric\m_Site. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. click Lines. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . click Subregion. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. try to replicate the location and proportion. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Although the exact dimensions are not important. 2 On the Design Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. When you finish the sketch in a later step.Tarmacadam for Name. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 8 On the Design Bar. select Site . click the value for Material. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file. and click OK. and click OK. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. 6 In the Materials dialog. and click to open the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. enter Parking for Name. under Identity Data. click Properties.

This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. expand Schedules/Quantities. and double-click Topography Schedule. As you create new subregions. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch.Tarmacadam. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under Floor Plans. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. 12 On the View Control Bar. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.9 On the View Control Bar. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Edit Boundary. they display within this schedule.

Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Within each subregion. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . Delete overlapping lines. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. In this training project. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 22 On the Design Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. click Subregion. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

enter Island . Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . under Identity Data. 24 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar.23 In the upper-right parking area. under Schedules/Quantities. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 26 In the Materials dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. click Properties. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. double-click Topography Schedule. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click OK. click the value for Material. 29 On the View Control Bar.Grass for Name. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.Grass for Name. click Finish Sketch. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.

add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. 34 On the Design Bar. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ .31 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. You must sketch each region separately. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 35 On the Design Bar. Name each region Island Grass. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Name the subregion Walkway. and apply the material Site . double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site. click Lines. under Floor Plans. click Subregion.Grass. 32 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.walkway.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. under Schedules/Quantities. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . there is still only one toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser.

41 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. this project file is required in its current state. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. under Floor Plans. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder.rvt. and click Save. 2 Select the toposurface.rvt. When you use the grading tool. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.

click (Element Properties). 5 On the Design Bar.3 On the Options Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 8 Select the topographic surface. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Copy Internal Points. select Existing for Phase Created. click Modify. A warning dialog is displayed. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. click Graded Region. under Phasing. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. see the tutorial. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Using Phasing on page 761. and click Select and Edit. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE.

and new. 11 On the View Control Bar.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. demolished.

13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 17 On the Design Bar. click Point. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 18 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click (Default 3D View). specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.

click to view it at various angles. When you add a building pad. 24 On the View menu. and click OK. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . you can delete it. this project file is required in its current state. and delete it. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.20 On the View toolbar. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click View Properties. click View Properties. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. (SteeringWheels). A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. specify New Construction for Phase. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. under Phasing. you create a building pad. under Phasing. Therefore. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. only the original toposurface displays. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Only the graded topography displays. specify Existing for Phase. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface.

the Pick Walls command is active. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. If you have an existing building model. click Pad. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines.rvt. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. NOTE By default. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser.

Adding Site Components on page 706. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. click (Default 3D View). click (SteeringWheels). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the View toolbar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Notice the new building pad. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . this project file is required in its current state. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the View toolbar.

click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . Site tutorial-in progress. and select the parking space.rvt. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. double-click Site.90 deg.Adding Site Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. click Parking Component. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 707 . Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click (Default 3D View).

Notice the new parking spaces. choose any tree type. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . click (SteeringWheels). Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.9 On the View toolbar. double-click Site. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Type Selector. click Site Component.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 15 On the View toolbar. In the following illustration. click (Default 3D View). Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the View toolbar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click (SteeringWheels). Adding Site Components | 709 .

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Hidden Line. double-click Site. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. and click Apply. under Floor Plans. this project file is required in its current state. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. and click OK. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Apply. 5 On the View menu.rvt. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. click Tag All Not Tagged. Site tutorial-in progress.

You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 8 On the Options Bar. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. as shown: 10 Using the same method. Click again to the left to position the leader.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. outside of the site. Click up and to the left. In the following exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . to position the shoulder of the leader. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 Press and hold CTRL. 11 On the Design Bar.

You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.■ Clear Leader. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . 14 On the Design Bar.

and under Heading.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. number the first three spaces consecutively. 13 In the Parking Schedule. select Parking for Category. click Tile. click Schedule/Quantities. 4 Under Available fields. and click Add. double-click Site. 5 Under Available fields. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . select Mark. and click OK. 8 Under Fields. click the Fields tab. enter Space. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 11 On the Window menu. enter Size. select Type. and click OK. The parking schedule is displayed. If necessary. Site tutorial-in progress. under Space. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Floor Plans. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Site plan. select Type. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.rvt. under Views (all). and click Add. 10 In the Project Browser. and under Heading. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Under Fields. click Close Hidden Windows. 9 On the Window menu. select Mark.

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.

716 .

They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . such as walls.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. select the desired workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. The first time you activate worksets within a project. After the project is shared. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Elements specific to a view. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. and click Editable. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. go to the Worksets dialog. A workset is a collection of building elements. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. however. When you are working on a shared project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. and so on. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. In this tutorial. floors. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. doors. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. You can enable Worksharing for any project. they cannot make changes to it. you must first enable Worksharing. you specify an active workset. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. To make a workset editable. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. called Worksharing. Using Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. such as annotations and dimensions. use Element Borrowing. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. stairs. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on.

Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. In a multi-story structure. and View worksets. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . In most projects. After learning the fundamentals. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. When setting up Worksharing. You should have at least one workset for each person. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. In the next exercise. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson.dialog. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. not including the Project Standards. Instead. In the lessons and exercises that follow. for a typical project. such as a tenant interior. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Experience has shown that. Shared Levels and Grids. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team.

By subdividing the project based on these task roles. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. As new members create worksets for their own use. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed.Team member roles Typically. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. designers work in teams. each team member has control over a portion of the design. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. On this tab. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. For example. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. When you create a new workset. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. with each assigned a specific functional task. if a workset named Interior was created. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. When creating the new worksets. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Regardless of the default setting. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately.

you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. within the local file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. This makes them available to other team members. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. When you save locally (to your local file). it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. your changes are saved. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you can select which workset is active. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Therefore. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. This is called “Selective Open. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When you save to the central file. After saving to the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. the file is saved as the central file. When you save to the central file. however. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. proceeds as usual. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. When finished or at regular intervals. Generally. On the Options Bar. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. However. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you should then save to your local file. you make that workset editable by you. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. As you work. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you have the option to choose which worksets to open.

Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. reload the latest changes from the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. for instance. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. and make that workset editable. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and then save the local file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. make any required worksets editable. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. using VPN. To do this. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When working remotely. In this instance. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. save to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. Alternatively. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. In this situation. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. In the next exercise. you should check out the Materials workset. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you can make the workset Editable at Risk.

click Training Files. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Your username displays as the present owner. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. When you enable worksharing. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. and notice all are editable by you.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. under Show." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. 3 In the Worksets dialog. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. The Worksets dialog displays. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing.rvt. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. and open Common\c_Worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. click Worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.

Only User-Created worksets should display. imagine four users including yourself. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. under Identity Data. clear Visible by default in all views. and double-click Level 1. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. expand Floor Plans. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. When you initially activate Worksharing. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. click New. 8 Click OK. For example. however. expand Views (all). 14 In the Worksets dialog. In this case. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. a small number of team members are working on the building model. you can rename the default workset. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 9 Click New. Therefore. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Click Rename. For training purposes. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. currently named Workset1. Because the interior walls appear in many views. You do. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and Views. and click OK. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. 13 In the Rename dialog. type the name Exterior Shell. In this training file. In this simple training project. another is assigned the interior layout. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . ■ 5 Under Show. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. clear Families. Project Standards. it is better to make them visible by default. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. click OK. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 17 On the Options Bar. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. select Workset1. 11 In the Worksets dialog.

21 On the Options Bar. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 26 On the View menu. click . click . 24 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and walls. click Visibility/Graphics. 20 Select one of the interior walls. under Identity Data. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. click the Worksets tab. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Interior Layout for Workset. 29 Click OK. stairs. under Identity Data. select Interior Layout for Workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. and click OK. including the interior doors.19 Click OK.

43 Click OK. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 42 On the right side of the dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. click Save As. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 35 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 38 In the Save As dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Identity Data. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click . under Views (all). 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Worksets tab. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. and click OK. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 33 In the Project Browser. Now that you have created the central file. and click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. select Interior Layout for Workset. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 39 Click Save. 32 Select Interior Layout. 30 On the View menu. click Close. 44 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. click Non Editable. make sure you remember the location of this central file. If any interior elements remain. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 34 In the drawing area. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 36 In the Element Properties dialog.

and select Yes for Editable. Before working on the model. click Save As. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. If you have not yet completed the exercise. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Next.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You have created a local file which is for your use only. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. click Worksets. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. and select Specify. you create your local file. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 7 In the Save As dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 4 Click Open. click Options. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Name. select the central file. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. select all the User-Created worksets. click Open. please do so before continuing. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 12 Click OK. In addition. 13 On the Window menu. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 2 In the Open dialog. and double-click Level 1. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. expand Views (all). 15 In the Project Browser. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 6 On the File menu. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. check out worksets. expand Floor Plans. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. make modifications to the building model. and click Save. In this case. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. select Interior Layout. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model.

20 Under Constraints. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. If this is selected. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . In this case. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. you can still edit this wall. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the File menu. In the Worksets dialog. click . click Worksets. Because this element is not owned by another user. On the Options Bar. 24 Click OK. 22 Click OK. click . the Edited by value is now assigned to you. notice the Editable Only option. 18 On the Options Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. If it was owned by another user. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. under Identity Data. click Modify. however. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Verify that it is cleared. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset.

and modify the length so that the corridor is open. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Modify. click Door.126mm Partition (2-hr). 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. select Basic Wall: Interior . 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. The precise location is not important. 26 Delete the door. 34 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor.

37 In the Save to Central dialog. When working in your local file. a tooltip. Borrowed Elements is selected. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In this particular case. displays the workset as well as the element type. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. each user must check out worksets. please do so before continuing. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. you created your local file. and reload the latest changes. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. checked out worksets. make elements editable. save to central. Throughout the process. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. it is recommended. leave this file open in its current state. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. In addition. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. By default. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. click Save to Central. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. Whenever you save. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In this exercise. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you should relinquish all worksets. If you have not yet completed these exercises. two users access the central file through a network connection.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. add two door openings into the rooms you created. For training purposes. At the end of a work session. You modified the building model. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you should perform regular saves. and save locally immediately afterward.

and select Yes for Editable. and reset the Username to your computer login name. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and select Specify. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 11 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. click Worksets. consider that person to be User 1. under Username. and click Save. specifically sequenced. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Save As. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and proceed to Creating a local copy.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . return to the Settings dialog. click Options. and click OK. In the following section of this exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central.rvt. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. You now have a local copy of the project. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. instructions are staggered. 3 On the Settings menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 12 In the Save As dialog. click Options. In addition. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. This file is for your use only. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. User 2: Create a local file. 9 Click Open. enter User 2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. select the central file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Open. 4 Click the General Tab and. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. This is a system setting. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and click OK. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. For training purposes. skip the following section. 7 In the Open dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 15 On the File menu. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog.

click Worksets.” 29 Click OK. click Save to Central. User 1: Check out worksets. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. it becomes the active workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. expand Floor Plans. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. expand Floor Plans. If you only have one workset checked out. select the lower exterior wall. If it is not open. 19 On the File menu. 27 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 23 Click OK. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Views (all). 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning.You are now the owner of that workset. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 17 Click OK. expand Views (all). and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. and double-click Level 1. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. open it now. modify the building model. 24 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and double-click Level 1. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration.

click Save to Central. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 44 In the Project Browser. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 33 On the File menu. When you save to central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. However. 42 Select Furniture Layout. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. click Worksets. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Yes for Editable. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. 41 On the File menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset.” 35 Click OK.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. 46 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. and click Rename. under Views (all). The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. Click Yes. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. click Reload Latest. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Save to Central. 43 In the Project Browser. The changes User 2 made are apparent. under Floor Plans. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 38 In the Save to Central dialog.” 39 Click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 37 On the File menu. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. you should create a furniture plan view. and click OK. Before adding any furniture. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.

49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Modify. and click Element Properties. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Reload Latest. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 61 Click OK 2 times. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Save to Central. click Component. click Worksets.200mm. under Show. such as Wall Types. 60 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Rename. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. select Project Standards. 65 Click OK. 66 On the File menu. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. NOTE System families. click Edit/New. 50 On the View menu. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 62 On the File menu. are placed under Project Standards. enter Exterior Wall . select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. Therefore. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 63 In the Worksets dialog. choose any desk. 53 On the File menu. the Visible by default option was not selected. rather than Families.” 55 Click OK. 48 In the Type Selector. and click inside any room. click the Worksets tab. click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 .

you need to set up your central and local files. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. click Save As. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. select Save to Central. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and still have your local files open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 70 On the File menu. click Training Files. As each of you work. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In subsequent steps. and click OK. Each user checked out worksets. User 1: Reload latest. click Options. Each user must have network access to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and these problems are rectified. and save 69 On the File menu. Checking out worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. At the appropriate point in this exercise. and published their changes back to the central file. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . finished the previous workset exercises. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. leave this file open in its current state. throughout this training. leave this file open in its current state.rvt.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. There are specific instructions for each user. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. modified the building model. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you save the training file as a central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. select the following. select Reload Latest.

You have created a local file which is for your use only. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 6 On the File menu. 8 In the Save As dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Open. and click OK. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click Save. Set the Username to User 2. On the Settings menu. 15 Click Open. This is the local file for User 1. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click Save. click Options. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. click Save As. and click OK. select Make this a Central File after save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Next. This is a system setting. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. and select Specify. In addition. and click OK. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. return to the Settings dialog. and click OK. click Save As. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 5 Click Save.4 In the File Save Options dialog. The central file should still be open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 12 On the File menu. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. select the central file. click Options. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 13 In the Open dialog.

User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. and click Open. You are now the owner of that workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. 30 On the left exterior wall. select the Interior Layout workset. and then click OK. select them. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. You are now the owner of that workset. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and click Editing Requests. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. After you submit the request. click the File menu. At this point. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. select the second window from the top. if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. double-click Level 1. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 29 On the Options Bar. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 27 Under Active Workset. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 26 In the Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout. and then click OK. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and select Yes for Editable.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. select Exterior Shell. Afterwards. click Worksets. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Worksets. 24 Under Active Workset.

and close 39 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 35 Click Grant. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and the other user granted it. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. 36 Click Close. click Check Now. 38 Click OK. In this case. select Save to Central. and notice the window is in the new location. select the following.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and click OK. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select the request submitted by User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . to Local. you requested permission to edit the element. In this multi-user exercise. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click Close.

738 .

The client has asked you to create various options. you can have multiple sets of design options. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). At any time in the design process. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. 739 . The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. For example. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. Using design options. In addition. and each option set can have multiple schemes. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. In this tutorial. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this particular case. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes.

the only available command is to create a new option set. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. click Edit Selected. 2 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you can edit it. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you design each of the structural options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. make your final design decision. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. After you create a design option. each with multiple design options. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the second exercise. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). and click Close. With the second option. each is constructed for interchangeability. In the left pane of the Open dialog.In the first exercise in this lesson. TIP In this exercise. the roof and structure systems must work together.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click New. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. under Option Set. you set up multiple design option sets. click Training Files. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. therefore.

expand Views (all). 5 On the View menu. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 7 In the Type Selector. In this case. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . select: ■ ■ ■ . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column.4 In the Project Browser. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. By selecting Multiple. 9 On the Design Bar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. click 12 On the Options Bar. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. In the following illustration. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. click Column. add three columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Floor Plans. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. click Modify. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. TIP To center the middle column. and the third column centered between the two. or add a dimension string between the columns. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and double-click ROOF TERRACE.

they are difficult to see in this view. 17 Zoom out and. using the same technique. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Because of the size of the columns. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished. 18 On the View toolbar. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.

two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Next. 21 In the Type Selector. The first click specifies the beam start point. click Beam. under Floor Plans. Adding a beam is a two-click process. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . 23 On the Design Bar. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Zoom in on the upper right column. 19 In the Project Browser.Notice the 12 columns that you added. In it. click Modify. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. you add the beams that span the columns. Use the following illustration as a guide. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. double-click TOP OF CORE. and click at its center to set the beam start point. select Round Bar : 50mm.

select: ■ ■ ■ . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column.25 On the Edit toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click the center point. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click . 30 On the View toolbar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 28 Zoom out.

notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). and click OK. click Rename. 46 Under Option. under Option. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click New. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog. There should now be two roofing design options. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 38 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. enter Beam for New. and click OK. 41 Under Option Set. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Roofing for New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . click Rename. click New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 40 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. under Option. name the option Louvers. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter Structure for New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. under Option. and click OK. and click OK. enter Brackets for New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. select Option 1 (primary). 45 Under Roofing. click New. not a new option set. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and.

under Structure. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. Under Now Editing.47 Under Roofing. and click OK. select Edit Selected. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. click Rename. select Beam. 53 In the Project Browser. This allows you to more easily manage the project. it will resemble the following illustration. under Floor Plans. 50 In the Design Options dialog. 51 Under Edit. 52 Click Close. name the option Sunscreen. When finished. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Option 2. 48 Under Option. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. double-click ROOF TERRACE. you create the second design option. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.

Refer to the following illustration. select M_Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Align. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component. 58 On the Tools menu. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second click represents the plane that is moved.

61 On the Design Bar. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 62 Select the beam and. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. on the Edit toolbar. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . The first click sets the move start point. click Modify. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.60 After aligning the beam. The second click represents the move end point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.

That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click Save As.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 67 On the Tools menu. 66 On the View toolbar. 69 Click Close. which is visible by default. m_Urban_House-in progress. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . click .rvt. you need this file in its current state. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that even before you close the dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Finish Editing. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 70 On the File menu. and click Save. name the file. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 68 In the Design Options dialog.

In the next exercise. Sunscreen. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. under Roofing. The second roofing system. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span.rvt. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 4 Under Edit. the other for beams. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. click Edit Selected. a Louver system. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. 6 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. 2 On the Tools menu. 5 Click Close. 8 In the Type Selector. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. delete them after the rafter is in place. and double-click TOP OF CORE. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Under Now Editing. do so now. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. click Component. select Louvers (primary). If you need to add dimensions. expand Views (all). you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. expand Floor Plans. With the second option. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you design each of the roofing options. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. you set up multiple design option sets. The first option. open it now. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 10 Referring to the following illustration. each with multiple design options to pick from.

Select 2nd for Move To. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. click Array. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 13 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. enter 11750 mm for Length. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Modify.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 15 On the Edit menu. Enter 5 for Number. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. Select Constrain.

when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990. and press ENTER.

25 With the louver still selected. click Modify. and click OK. Enter 34 for Number. 20 In the Type Selector. under Other. Select 2nd for Move To. click Component. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 5475 mm for Length. and click Array. click the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 26 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. 27 For the array starting point. 23 On the Options Bar. and select the louver you just placed. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 22 On the Design Bar. click . click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Louver 50mm x 150mm.

Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 29 On the View toolbar. and press Enter. enter 300. and. when the listening dimension displays. click . 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .28 Move the cursor vertically downward.

39 On the Design Bar. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 30 On the Tools menu. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click . select Sunscreen. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 33 Under Editing. Therefore. expand Elevations. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Edit. and double-click West. In this case. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. and click OK.The louver roof system is complete. 31 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 34 In the Project Browser. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. click Lines. click Edit Selected. Click OK. under Roofing. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and then click Close. click Finish Editing. 40 On the Options Bar.

Select the right arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. The first two points define the ends of the line. 41 Select the top of the left column. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Under Constraints. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 48 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 45 Click OK. 46 On the Tools menu. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. click Properties. the top of the next column on the right. click Trim/Extend. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 43 On the Design Bar. You will fix this in a later step. then the center arc. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. The arcs should connect. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. then you can modify it through the dimension. click .This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. and the third point defines the arc. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 49 On the View toolbar. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End.

The second roofing system. and last options. Sunscreen. Managing Design Options In this exercise. click Save. 4 In the Project Browser. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. tertiary. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Close. under Views (all). you need this file in its current state. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you designed each of the roofing options. enter Primary Option. secondary. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. After exploring the combinations. and click Rename. do so now. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. and delete the discarded design options. and click Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. right-click {3D}. 51 In the Design Options dialog. click Finish Editing. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. under 3D Views.The louver roof system is complete. 50 On the Tools menu. 52 On the File menu. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. The first option. Managing Design Options | 757 . was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. and click OK. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. you select a design. In this exercise. under Edit. make it part of the building model. a Louver system.

under Views (all). 10 In the Project Browser. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 7 On the View menu. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. double-click Secondary Option. click the Design Options tab. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and click OK. 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Primary Option.5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views.

20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Last Option. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 15 On the View menu. 19 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. At this point. under 3D Views. Managing Design Options | 759 . In your design options. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option. under Views (all).14 In the Project Browser. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. and click OK. In this case. under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 27 In the alert dialog. click Yes. and deleted the discarded design options. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Close. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 26 Under Option Set. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. Because the client has selected the design option. 25 Select Structure. select Make Primary. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 30 Under Option Set.22 On the Tools menu. An alert is displayed. 24 Under Option. click Accept Primary. This was the client choice for structural. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. under Structure. The set is deleted. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 29 Select Roofing. After exploring the combinations. 35 On the File menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. since you no longer need them. the beam option becomes part of the model. In this exercise. select Beam. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. you selected a design. 23 In the Design Options dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. made it part of the building model. click Yes. the current primaries are no longer options. click Save. double-click Primary Option. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Delete. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views.

You create new phases. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. demolish existing construction.Project Phasing 22 In any project. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the second exercise. 761 . you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. For the client. This changes room definition and total building model area. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. then add new walls and doors in a different location. complete with schedules. demolish existing walls and doors. In the second exercise. and then add new building model elements. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.

During the demolition and renovation process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 4 Click Cancel. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Level 1. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. and open Common\c_Phasing. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click Cancel. click Project Units. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. As you add new elements to the building model.rvt. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . define the units. In the Element Properties dialog.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. under Phasing. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click (Element Properties). under Phasing. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. click Training Files. click Modify. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. This means that all building model elements. regardless of phase. expand Views (all). and click OK. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. expand Floor Plans. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. go to the Settings menu. 6 On the Options Bar. are visible in this view. If you wish to do so. When you create a new project.

select Existing. Phasing Your Model | 763 . and click OK. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 14 On the Design Bar.Existing. including the door tags. and click OK. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. and click Rename. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click No. 18 In the Project Browser. click . under Floor Plans. and click OK. clear Door Tags. right-click Level 1.Demo. are highlighted in red. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction.Existing. for Phase Created. click (Filter Selection). you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. all of the building model elements. Because this is a renovation project. Because this is a phase-specific view. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 11 In the Filter dialog. under Phasing. 16 In the Rename dialog. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. enter Level 1 . You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 20 In the Rename dialog. After you create the views. and click Rename.Existing. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. After you release the mouse button.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. right-click Copy of Level 1 . enter Level 1 . click Modify. right-click Level 1 . Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties.

A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. click the Phase Filters tab. to which all the building model elements belong. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. and Temporary. new construction occurs after existing construction. In this case. however. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. There are five default phase filters. under Floor Plans. under Phasing. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 27 Click New. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 For Composite Plan. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. select Existing. and click OK. 28 Under Filter Name. 24 In the Project Browser.Demo. Next. enter Composite Plan. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. under Floor Plans. You may need to zoom in to see this. Phase status is time-dependent.Existing. you modify these settings. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. Existing. double-click Level 1 . Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under New. Demolished. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Later in this exercise. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. for Phase. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. select Overridden. Because of this time relationship. On a logical time line. 26 In the Phasing dialog.

Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. you demolish all elements hosted by it. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. under Floor Plans. Phasing Your Model | 765 .Demo. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select the interior walls one at a time. double-click Level 1 . 32 In the Demolished row. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Next. 35 Click OK twice. 34 In the Color dialog. or you can use the demolish tool. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 36 Using the same method. select the line style. click the value for Color. 42 In the Project Browser. When you demolish the host. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. double-click Level 1 . select red. under Cut ➤ Lines. 39 In the Phasing dialog. click (Demolish). As you click each wall. select Demolished. you begin demolition. under Floor Plans. click OK. select a lighter blue. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. There are two ways to demolish an element.Existing. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. its display changes to a red dashed line. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser.31 Under Phase Status.

45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector. 49 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Phase Filter. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and click OK. select Show Previous + New. under Phasing. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. for Phase Filter. under Phasing. The demolished walls no longer display. 53 Open Level 1 . 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 52 Open Level 1 .Existing. 50 In the Type Selector. click Wall. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".Demo.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). add a long horizontal wall. and click OK. click Door.

and existing shows as half-tone.New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. click (Default 3D View). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. 57 In the Project Browser. regardless of phase.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 60 On the View toolbar. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).Demo.New. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 59 Open Level 1 . 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . 61 On the View Control Bar. which are displayed as red. because the phase filter is set to Show All. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 62 If necessary. All elements are displayed in this view. new is shown in blue. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The renovated building model plan is displayed.

room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. In this exercise. and new construction. the rooms change in both definition and size. Notice that this view is the original building model. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. demolition. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. As the renovation process continues. therefore. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Project Units. you can see the new walls added to the building model. 3 Open Level 1 . In the next exercise. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. and double-click Level 1 . If you wish to do so.New. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. All room boundaries are phase-specific. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. 63 Close the file. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Existing. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. If you wish to save this file. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .rvt.Demo. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 2 Open Level 1 . In this view. you can do so at this time. define the units. In this view. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. You can also see that the room quantities. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. sizes. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. go to the Settings menu.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Modify. 10 Open Level 1 . 13 Open Level 1 . click Room. click Room. yet they have different room numbers. 5 Click OK.New. click Room Tag. Use the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.Demo.Existing. In the Phasing dialog. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click in each room as you move to the right. 9 On the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. and maximize the view. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 6 Open Level 1 . 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 .

In this exercise. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.Existing. In this case. 20 Close the file. In addition. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . The two schedule views tile. and double-click Room Schedule . 18 Open Room Schedule . You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. click Tile. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. View phase-specific room schedules. 19 On the Window menu. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. click Close Hidden Windows. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 16 In the Project Browser.New Construction. 17 On the Window menu. expand Schedules/Quantities.

771 . and manage the links throughout the project. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. You position the building models on the site plan. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. In this tutorial. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. modify their visibility. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In the final lesson. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In these situations. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. This maximizes efficiency. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. performance.

Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . One building model is a condominium. You link two building models to the project. and the other is a townhouse. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You position the building models on the site. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. modify their visibility. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.

■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. select the three files.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and click OK. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. RELATED See the lesson. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. All three files now reside.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. 5 On the File menu. c_Condo_Complex. click Save As. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.rvt. 2 On the File menu. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . in the Model Linking folder that you created. and open Common\c_Site. ■ ■ Manual . and save the file there. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. This option is grayed out. click Close. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. and click Properties. 8 Clear Read-only.■ Auto . this option will place the link at a predefined location.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. click Training Files. c_Townhouse. Manual . Click Open. 4 On the File menu. Auto . use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. this system is not exposed to the user. however. Select c_Site. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. click Open. click Open. Otherwise. right-click. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. you can do so. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. with write permission.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model.

and double-click Level 1. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. If you wish to do so.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. you can go to the Settings menu. Notice the blue detail lines. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 13 Click Open. expand Views (all). click Project Units. you do not need to change the project units to metric. select Auto . 10 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 11 On the File menu. For Positioning. and make your changes.Origin to Origin.

The Move command requires two clicks. 15 On the Edit toolbar. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The linked model moves as one object. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 17 For the move endpoint. click (Move). The first click specifies the move start point. 16 For the move start point. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . After you select it.

select Auto . Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.After you specify the location to move to. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. For Positioning. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and select c_Townhouse. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open.Origin to Origin.

click to specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . In this case. click (Rotate). 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. To rotate an object. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. click (Move). 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

click (Copy). and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The Copy command works much like the Move command.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.

32 On the Edit menu. click . under Identity data. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 37 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. use the Move command to make any adjustments.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. click Rotate. enter Townhouse A. 34 On the Options Bar. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.

NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. After linking the files. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.38 On the File menu. When you originally linked the files. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. 2 On the SteeringWheels. click and hold Orbit. they were placed too low within the site topography. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. In the next exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. do so before continuing. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you need this project file open and in this view. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click (SteeringWheels). In this exercise. click Save. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development.

click (Align). you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. To do this. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. When using the Align command. and click OK. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 7 On the Tools toolbar. In the steps that follow. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. when it highlights. In this case. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project.rvt. and click to select it. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you first select the plane you want to align to. under Views (all). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. and click to select the line.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. expand Elevations. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and double-click South. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. Click the Revit Links tab. and then select the plane that you want to align. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project.

and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. under Elevations. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 12 On the View toolbar. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 9 In the Project Browser. double-click North.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click 13 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click and hold Orbit. click Save. 14 On the SteeringWheels. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click (Default 3D View). Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 15 On the File menu. This would over-constrain the model. 11 Return to the South elevation view.

11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you link a file. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. If the Basics page is set to Custom.rvt. By linked view. detail level. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. or Custom. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. click OK. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. click the Revit Links tab. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. If you have not completed the previous exercise. under Elevations. select <Custom>.rvt. expand c_Townhouse. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. 10 Click OK. 8 For Annotation Categories. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. 9 Under Visibility. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this exercise. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. click By Host View. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. double-click South.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. do so before continuing. 2 On the View menu. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. click Custom. click Visibility/Graphics. scroll down and clear Levels. As you can see. and the halftone settings for each linked project. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you can independently control the visibility settings. In the next exercise. display settings. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. 4 Under Visibility. you need this project file open and in this view. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. click By Host View. By default. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. or fine. Using the Custom option. 23 In the Model categories list. With linked files. click the Revit Links tab. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. on the Basics tab. 20 For c_Townhouse. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. select Custom. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. medium. 14 On the View menu. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 .rvt. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. select <Custom>. click Visibility/Graphics. expand c_Townhouse. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. In this case. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. You can click the value for Detail Level. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. By selecting custom under Model Categories. and click OK.rvt. double-click Level 1. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. click the Revit Links tab.rvt.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. under Display Settings. 24 Click OK. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. and then set the detail level to coarse. 16 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. no detail level changes are required. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model.

31 On the File menu.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. With the Show All filter applied. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. However.rvt. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. there are situations. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. you need this project file open and in this view. select c_Townhouse. In this case. 26 Under Display Settings. on a sloped site for instance. In this exercise. 25 On the Revit Links tab. click Save. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. In the next exercise. In this case. In most cases. 28 Select By linked view for View range. phase. and phase filter of a specific link. under Visibility. 29 Click OK. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. this is preferable. all new. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. demolished. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. By default. existing. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. you manage the linked files. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. click Custom for the Townhouse link. All other components are grayed out. a connection to the linked project continues to exist.

select c_Condo_Complex. If you have not completed the previous exercise. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.rvt. In a shared coordinate environment. do so before continuing. In general. Notice the Loaded. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 7 Click OK.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. Locations Not Saved. You learn more about this in the next lesson. 3 Under Path Type. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. click Manage Links. They supply information regarding the links. the link is maintained. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . The default path type is Relative. 4 Under Linked File. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. click Yes. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. click the Revit tab. 6 At the confirmation prompt. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. 5 Click Unload. and Saved Path fields are read only. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location.

Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. However. and click Reload. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. In these cases. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. To do this. the link is not loaded. When you initially place the link. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. click Save As. 9 On the File menu. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . right-click c_Condo_Complex. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. 8 In the Project Browser. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. In general. click the arrow next to the Open button. If you choose not to open that workset. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. In the Import/Link RVT dialog.rvt. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. and select Specify. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. expand Revit Links. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files.

In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. and save it as an RVT file. and the resulting project files. In this exercise. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. do so before continuing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772.10 In the Save As dialog. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. In the next lesson. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. If you have not completed the previous lesson. When used in conjunction with model linking. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. leave the project file open in its current view. In essence. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. you are establishing a shared origin point. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). name the file Site_Project. When you share coordinates between projects. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. The host file consists primarily of site components. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project.

As indicated in the Status Bar. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. and the resulting project files. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. click the Condo Complex.rvt and click Open. open it before continuing.coordinates are used. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . When you are working in the host project. In this case. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. click Open. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. If you have not completed the lesson. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. 2 On the Tools menu. 3 In the drawing area. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. If you have closed the project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Select Site_Project. Linking Building Models on page 772. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

and Lot C. select Location 1. On the Status Bar.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. If you have not completed the exercise. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. 5 On the Design Bar. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. it is placed at a specific location. when the edges highlight. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. you need this project file open and in this view. even though both models originate from one linked file. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. In this exercise. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. and click OK. do so before continuing. These three locations can be named Lot A. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. but can have multiple additional locations. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. However. click to select it. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Lot B. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 .

5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. . 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This is a one-time operation. When constraining a link to a location. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Change. under Instance Parameters. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 7 In the Rename dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. Record the current position as a location. enter Lot A for New. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 4 Under Value. click Reconcile. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once.2 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Select Location dialog. click Rename. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. under Instance Parameters. In the Choose Location dialog. click . Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. and click OK. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Move instance to. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The first click specifies the move start point. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. When you create a location. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and the left townhouse resides at that location. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. Because Lot A is currently in use. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. and click OK. or cancel the action. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. ignore the warning. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 30 On the Tools menu. Record current position as. 26 Click OK. click OK. make sure Lot B is selected. and then select the townhouse project. click OK. 16 Click Change. By relocating a project. select Save. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. This is a two-click process. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. you cannot redefine its location. and click OK. select the second option. To explicitly save a location. click Manage Links. click Duplicate.Notice the OK button is not active. a warning displays. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . click the Revit tab. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. enter Lot B for Name. the active location position is moved. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. When you release the mouse button. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. 23 Click Save Locations. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. Notice the OK button is still not active. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. The second click specifies the move endpoint. When you relocate a project. 19 In the Select Location dialog. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected.

33 On the Edit menu. In this exercise. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. and click OK. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. select Save. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 34 On the File menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Close. you work in one of the linked projects. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. click Save. 36 On the File menu. NOTE In the following exercise.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 .rvt file. In this exercise. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select c_Condo_Complex. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. if other models were linked into the same host. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. In addition. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. When opening the linked file. click Open. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. 2 On the File menu. If you have not completed the exercises. select Auto . under Floor Plans. Click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. For Positioning. The current active location is Lot A.By Shared Coordinates. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. it is placed automatically within the host project.rvt file. Because this building model only has one named location. double-click 1st Floor. do so before continuing.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. Also.

7 Click OK. 6 Select Lot B. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. click Manage Place and Locations. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. you can select Lot C if necessary. 3 In the Name dialog. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. select True North for Orientation. click Duplicate. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you create a new location. orient a view to true north. under Graphics. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. and click Make Current. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. you manage the shared locations.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. In this exercise. enter Lot C. and click OK. click View Properties. In the next exercise. and click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. In this exercise. In the host file. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. you need this project file open and in this view. click Manage Place and Locations. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. If you have not completed the exercises. do so before continuing.

9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. click Open. If you have not completed the exercise.rvt and click Open. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 10 On the File menu. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. In this exercise. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. You can save the file if you wish. On the Options Bar. Select Site_Project. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. click Close.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. do so before continuing. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu.

under Category.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields. and click Add. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 3 In the New Schedule dialog. select Doors. select Count. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Fields tab.

click Close. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. clear Itemize every instance. In this exercise. 13 On the File menu. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. select Family and Type for Sort by. right-click Door Schedule. under Other. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.8 Click OK. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . click Save. 14 On the File menu. and then click OK twice. and click Properties. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. expand Schedules/Quantities. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. You have completed this tutorial. 12 Select Grand totals.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click the value for Selection color. Notice that the drawing area is black. click the Graphics tab. which is independent of the project settings. and your username when using worksets. 10 In the Options dialog. and click OK.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 3 In the Options dialog. notification preferences. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. you modify the system environment. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Browse. you create an office template. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the New Project dialog. These settings control the graphics. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. 8 In the New Project dialog. 803 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 4 Under Colors. click OK. selection default options. 11 Under Colors. under Template file. Finally. In the first lesson. they are not saved to project files or template files. journal cleanup options. In the second lesson. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and set it as your default template. select Invert background color. click Training Files. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment.

and click OK. 15 Click OK. click No. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. click Modify. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. clear Invert background color. 26 In the Options dialog. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors.12 In the Color dialog. 14 Under Notifications. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For Selection color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. select yellow. the elements causing the error display using this color. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. select None. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click the Graphics tab. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 When prompted to save changes. and select the wall. click Modify. However. click Wall. 18 On the Design Bar. select red. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. When an error occurs.rvt. select One hour. 19 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the General tab. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. For Tooltip assistance. and open Metric\m_Settings. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval.

4 Click Cancel. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Your login name displays by default. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 2 In the Options dialog. under Default path for family template files. 3 Under Default template file. including your default project template. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. such as in a large. do not save the changes. and click Browse to select a template. select Normal. click Places. Under Journal File Cleanup. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. TIP To view a template. select your preferred Save reminder interval. 10 In the Places dialog. For Tooltip assistance. notice the list of library names. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Under Username. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. and family libraries. If prompted. 5 Under Default path for user files. you specify default file locations. 7 In the Options dialog. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. centralized. click Browse. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. select the folder to save your files to by default. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.27 Click the General tab. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 8 Click Cancel. click the File Locations tab. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. However. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Browse. family template files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. and click Open. These files are used in the software support process. you can start a new project with that template.

Save. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and change the name to My Library. under Libraries. 11 In the Places dialog. In the following illustration. and select it as the library path. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Add Value). or families.library names and path. and you can create new libraries. When you are opening. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. or loading a Revit Architecture file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. templates. and click the icon side of the field. saving. Load. and click Open.

and click OK twice.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 15 Under Library Name. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Save. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. such as bump maps. view the current path. 5 In the text editor. 23 Select My Library. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 9 In the text editor. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. This path is determined during installation. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you work in a large office. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 21 Click the File Locations tab. specify the new location here. 22 Click Places. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. custom color files. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 24 Click 25 Click OK. click Edit. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and Import dialogs. 28 Click OK. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 Click Cancel. Load. 3 Under Settings. click My Library. 2 In the Options dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. If you want to relocate this path. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click the My Library icon. click the Spelling tab. enter sheetmtl-Cu. and decal image files.

If prompted. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. work with snapping turned off. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. do not save the changes. click Text. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click default template. click the Spelling tab. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. delete sheetmtl-CU. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Modify. click OK. 19 Under Settings. click Edit. under Template file.rte. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. In this exercise. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Restore Defaults. click Training Files. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . As you zoom in and out within a view. You can turn snap settings on and off. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 23 In the Options dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. you modify snap settings. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click OK. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 22 In the text editor. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 18 In the Options dialog.11 In the Options dialog. click OK. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap increments. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 2 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Wall. 7 Under Object Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. If it does not. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings.. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. zoom out until it does so. and enter 500 .6 Under Dimension Snaps. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . use the wheel button on your mouse. clear Chain. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. click OK. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 10 On the Options Bar. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter SM. If you do not have a wheel button. For example. TIP To zoom while sketching.

When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 24 Click OK. and do not save the file.. and the wall edges. and delete the value 500 . 21 Move the cursor downward. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that snapping is once again active. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and move the cursor to the right. click Modify. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and click Wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 18 Enter SM. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Do not set the wall end point.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This is the increment that you added previously. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. the midpoint. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

When you apply a material to an element. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. lines.rvt. and open Metric\m_Settings. save the project file with a unique name. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Using these options. annotations. You create and modify materials. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. In the steps that follow. and object styles. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. you render a region to observe the changes. Finally. fill patterns.

Stone. and texture of the material. 10 Click the Graphics tab. In the steps that follow. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. 3 Click (Duplicate). Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. this material provides a starting point for the new material. These details will display in rendered images. read-only library for render appearances. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. enter Masonry . and select Masonry . the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. select Stone.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry .Fieldstone material. The Render Appearance Library is a local. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. for Class. and double-click 02 Entry Level. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. The properties describe the color. 11 Click OK. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. However. In the next exercise. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. and click OK.Fieldstone. and click OK. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 9 Click Apply. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library.Fieldstone. Masonry . When a model element is loaded into a project. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and click (Element Properties). 6 Click Replace. scale. In the Materials dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. When you change properties of a render appearance.

select Masonry . click Edit/New.Fieldstone. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall.Fieldstone.Brick. click Edit. select the rear exterior wall. 23 While pressing CTRL. 15 Click Duplicate. 25 On the View toolbar. click in the Material field.14 In the Element Properties dialog. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . 18 For Finish 1. Fieldstone on CMU. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 24 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style. 20 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 17 For Structure. 21 Click OK three times. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click This is the material that you created. click (Default 3D View). 16 Enter the new wall name. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 19 On the right side of the Material field. .

for Setting. click Render. select Region. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. select Low or Medium. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 32 In the Rendering dialog. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 31 In the Rendering dialog. The rendering process begins. under Quality. right-click the Design Bar. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. click Rendering Dialog. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. When finished. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Rendering dialog. In the following exercise. and click Rendering. 29 In the 3D view. select the render region (a red rectangle).

Then click Render again. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. m_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 7 Under Custom. and double-click West. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 33 In the Rendering dialog. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. choose Model. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Show the model. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. select Custom. in the Rendering dialog. 3 Under Pattern Type. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.rvt. expand Elevations. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 5 Click New. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Zoom into the model. Drafting pattern density is fixed. click Show the model. click Import. and clear Region. such as steel.

Fieldstone. click Edit/New. enter Fieldstone. click in the Material field. click OK. (Element Properties). 23 On the Design Bar.56. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. click to select a fill pattern. 22 Click OK three times. select fldstn. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 21 In the Materials dialog. click . and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar.Fieldstone material. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 9 Under Custom. and click OK. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 For Name. click Training Files. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit. and for Import scale. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . under Pattern Type. 11 Click OK. enter . In the Materials dialog.pat. for Finish 1. click Modify.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. select Model. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click 15 For Structure.

Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 2 On the keyboard.rvt. click (Default 3D View). you can set the window frame material to By Category. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. m_Settings-in progress. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand 3D Views. there are often multiple window types within a project. TIP If the pattern does not display. For example.25 On the View toolbar. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3 Windows. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options.

under Materials and Finishes. 11 On the Options Bar. . 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. click By Category. click (Element Properties). click in the Value column. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click in the Value column.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Trim Exterior Material. click (Element Properties). and click . for Trim Exterior Material. 10 Select the arched window. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. and click 15 Click OK twice. under Materials and Finishes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 14 In the Materials dialog. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 9 Click OK twice.

29 In the Materials dialog. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 23 Click Replace. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. When you render a 3D view. 28 Under Shading. and click OK. 19 For Trim. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. click in the Material column. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and click OK. descriptions. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. expand Windows. (Duplicate). 30 In the Object Styles dialog.red paint. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 25 In the search field. enter Trim . . 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. click OK.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 18 On the Model Objects tab. or keywords include the word red. for Name. and select Trim. click OK. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. for Class. type red. select Trim. select Paint. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.

3 In the Line Patterns dialog. is open with the 3D view active. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. click New. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . m_Settings-in progress. m_Settings-in progress. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Roofs. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 10 For Line Color. enter Roof Line. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 11 For Line Pattern. for Name. 7 On the View Control Bar. Now that you have created a line pattern. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.31 On the View toolbar.rvt. select Roof Line. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. under Category. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. (Default 3D view).rvt. select Red. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . 14 On the View Control Bar. but not the line pattern. Notice that the line color displays in this view. 13 In the Project Browser. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. under 3D Views.12 Click OK. double-click to Building. click Model Graphics Style.

select Roofs. for Visibility. Plans. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 22 On the Model Categories tab. select Roof Line. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select 5.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. click Override. select Blue. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. For Pattern. 19 For Line Pattern. double-click 03 Roof. sections. 18 For Line Color. select Solid. 15 In the Project Browser. elevations. select Roofs. For Color. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 20 Click OK. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. under Category. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Black. under Floor Plans. 17 In the Object Styles dialog.

28 In the Line Styles dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. select Level: 02 Entry Level. double-click Site.25 Click OK twice. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 29 For Name. select Zoning Setback. (Line). For Line Color. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Red. For Line Pattern. select 2. 34 On the Options Bar. 31 Click OK. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Notice the site topography and the property lines. under Floor Plans. enter Zoning Setback. click New. 33 In the Type Selector. select Double dash. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . and click OK. click Lines. under Modify Subcategories. This places the line above the topography. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. Click Click (Draw).

NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. Expand Site. expand Lines. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. and clear Zoning Setback. under Floor Plans. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 43 Click OK. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 39 Click OK. double-click 02 Entry Level. NOTE If Site is not selected. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 44 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). and then clear Property Lines. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 36 On the View toolbar. and clear Property Lines. 40 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Model Categories tab. select it.

select Linear . 9 In the Type Selector. and then click outside the second wall. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Feet and fractional inches. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. For Units.Imperial. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Imperial and click OK. You have created a new dimension style.rvt. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. click Dimension.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. click the default value. click one wall. (Undo). 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. double-click 02 Entry Level. and place a dimension on the floor plan. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click Duplicate. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. Modifying Annotations | 825 . m_Settings-in progress. 10 On the Standard toolbar. click Modify. 7 Click OK twice. 5 Under Text. click another wall. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. for Units Format. 4 Enter the name Linear . m_Settings-in progress. To place a dimension.

notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.Number as the assigned tag. under Category.Number. click Training Files. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. In the preview image. click (Element Properties). 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Number. In the steps that follow. 21 In the Tags dialog. click M_Window Tag . Then press Delete. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave M_Window Tag . you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 16 Click Cancel. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the west wall. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Click Load. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 24 While pressing CTRL. 23 Click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.Number is now the assigned tag.rfa. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. select the 3 window tags. notice that the label displays 1i. click Tag ➤ By Category. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 Under Loaded Tags. clear Leader. scroll down to Windows. 18 In the Tags dialog. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.14 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. click the bottom window. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Options Bar.

M_Window Tag . 3 In the Format dialog. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. (Default 3D View).Under Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. for Area. select To the nearest 100. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. you modify the temporary dimension settings. dimension values display using this setting. and click OK. Unless overridden. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 32 On the View toolbar. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. notice Window Tags appears twice. dimensions use these project settings. you modify the detail level assignments.Number. Specifying Units of Measurement. select meters squared. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. select Openings. 2 In the Project Units dialog. you specify the project units of measurements. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 8 Under Walls. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. and Detail Level Options on page 827. Temporary Dimensions. 6 Click OK. verify that Create is clear. In the second section. select 0 decimal places. For Unit symbol. click the default value.Temporary Dimensions. for Length. 9 Under Doors and Windows. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view.Temporary Dimensions. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and Detail Level Options | 827 . the other displays the instance value. 31 On the Design Bar. for Rounding. click the default value. click Modify. and click OK. 30 Under Leader. m_Settings-in progress. select Faces. Click OK. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. Specifying Units of Measurement. 4 In the Project Units dialog. In the final section. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. Unless overridden. Specifying Units of Measurement.rvt. and click OK. In the first section.

you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. expand Floor Plans. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. and expand 3D Views. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 12 Click OK. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. expand Views (all).rvt. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. click Training Files. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. In this exercise. In this table. click . Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser.In this project. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. You do not select a view scale to move it. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and open Common\c_Project_Browser.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. select Discipline.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. select Type/Discipline. In the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg .Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 5 On the Views tab. 2 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 10 In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. and click OK. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand Sheets (all). expand each view type. and click Apply.

13 Select Sheet Prefix. click the Folders tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. under Sheets. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click New. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click the Views tab. expand each sheet set. and click OK.

When you create new projects. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. expand 3D Views. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click OK. Creating an Office Template on page 831. You can choose from several templates. If you want to save this file. For example. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. navigate to your preferred directory. In that case. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. Creating an Office Template | 831 . you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and open Metric\Templates. levels. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. the same rules apply. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. when you create a new project. and view names. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. and click Open. 2 Under Template file. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. click Browse. You can also save these settings in a template file. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and Discipline. dimensions styles. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. and expand both Architectural and Structural. In the lesson that follows. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Proceed to the next lesson. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment.rte template.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. In this lesson. under Views. and click OK. expand Complete. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Whenever you create a new project or template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. When you create a new template based on an existing template. you select the starting point for your office template. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. View Type (Family and Type). enter a unique file name. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. you create an office template. 21 In the Project Browser.

weights. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 12 Under Template File. 9 In the Project Browser. For example. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. you can select it now. select Project template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above.5 In the New Project dialog. 15 Under Create new. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. for Create new. 14 Click Open. you modify the project settings for your new template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. If you want to use a template other than the default. 13 Select the default template. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 7 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. select Project. close them. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click North. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. click Browse. When you create the material. and click OK. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 6 Click OK. If you have additional projects open. in the drawing area.

2 Scroll down the materials list. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. In the Object Styles dialog. You can align. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Observe the materials that are already defined. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. the changes are saved as part of the project template. Modifying System Settings on page 803. or refer to the online help. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. texture. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. TIP For more information about creating new materials. see a preview of the rendered material. 9 Click OK when finished. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. create new subcategories. rotate. For more details on modifying these settings. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and imported objects. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. you can set line weights. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and similar attributes. or refer to the online help. create and modify them as needed. or modify existing patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and materials for model objects. 4 Click Replace. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. For more information. line colors. transparency. including color. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and change render appearance properties. You do this by defining the render appearance. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 13 If necessary. see the previous lesson. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. annotation objects. and move model patterns.During this exercise. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. specific modifications are not dictated. If you change render appearance properties. line patterns. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. When you create or modify a material.

38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. To see the details of a particular style. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 29 Click OK. 20 Click OK. or line pattern as needed. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. and specify the properties. and create new subcategories as needed. create new line subcategories. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.15 Modify categories. modify the line weight. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and dimensions. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and click Edit. You can add and delete view scales. click Duplicate. such as section lines and dimension lines. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. select it from this list. 32 To modify a line pattern. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. select it. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. name the style. line color. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 34 Click OK. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 19 If necessary. tags. 18 For existing line categories.

55 Click OK. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. click Load. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. name the style. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. TIP In the drawing area. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 57 Specify the Slope option. 60 Under Walls. angular. click Format. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 46 Click OK. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 61 Under Doors and Windows. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 58 Click OK. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Volume. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. and Angle settings. Linear. 53 For Length. select it from this list. To see the details of a particular style. 50 To load new annotation tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. and radial dimensions are modified separately.40 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and click OK. In the Tags dialog. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. For example. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. click Duplicate. and specify the properties. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. and choose a decimal symbol. 62 Click OK. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.

Although these settings can be saved within a template. rename. Links to associated tutorials are provided. or edit existing organization types. 72 If necessary. However. For example. click the Views tab. Each command is available on the Settings menu. In a typical project. 65 Click OK. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. To move the view scales. 68 Delete. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 70 Click the Sheets tab. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. create new browser organization types. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. The detail level is based on view scale. create new browser organization types. and move view scales as needed. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. When you create a new view. You can find additional information in Help. or edit existing organization types. 73 Click OK. or Fine. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. See Setting up If necessary. rename. Use the table below as a checklist. and make modifications in each area as necessary. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. In such a case. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. Using the arrows between the columns. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 69 If necessary. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 64 Review the table. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 71 Delete. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. click the arrows between columns.

or use the Project Browser. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . If you have not completed the previous exercise. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or electrical fixtures. do so before starting this exercise. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Depending on the intended use of this template. If this selection is satisfactory. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. For example. you can set up the phases. the section cut material. title blocks. 75 Proceed to the next exercise.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Although the options are endless. and the poche depth. modify. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. and electrical fixtures. In the steps that follow. you do both. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. you may want to delete. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. there are some important thoughts to consider. furniture. 2 In the Type Selector. You can load any family or group into a template. you can set the default contour line interval. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. notice the list of doors already loaded. if you load every available window type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Although this is possible. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. you could load detail components. In addition. If necessary. However. click Door. For example. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. phase filters. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. or add to this selection. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you can move onto the next component type. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project.

and click OK. Make modifications. In the Element Properties dialog. or modify a door. and click OK. click Load. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. create. create. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Modify type properties. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. or load a new door type. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Select it. click Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. expand Families. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. and click Open. Enter a name. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Click Duplicate.3 To modify. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Notice that each family category is listed. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

View Range. create.) 10 Expand the title block. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. and click Delete. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. In addition. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. right-click the component. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. you created new projects using different templates. 11 On the Options Bar. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. Discipline. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. To load a title block. In addition. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Detail Level. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. click 12 Click Preview. (Element Properties). In this exercise. and select the title block type. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. click Load. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you create the views required for your template. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. 13 Click OK. load. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. To do so. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. This title block is currently part of the template.

double-click Site.settings of categories and subcategories. 6 Click OK. After applying the template. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. double-click Level 2. In this exercise. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 11 Click Apply. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. In addition. you will first modify view templates. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. select Site Plan. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. and double-click Level 1. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. and then click OK. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and apply the appropriate template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. you can apply a view template to any view. 12 In the Project Browser. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 4 If necessary. At any time. and click OK. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. click Apply. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. double-click South. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. open the view from the Project Browser. select Architectural Plan. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under Floor Plans. the view is not linked to the template in any way. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. under Elevations. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Every time a new plan view is created. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 2 Under Names. 15 In the Project Browser. click Apply. under Floor Plans.

right-click the ViewCube. 27 Create additional levels as needed. click Orient to a Direction. and click Properties. or delete them as needed. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select the desired view. (Default 3D View). notice that you have the option to rename.Notice the level names. click Level. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. If prompted. To orient the 3D view to a direction. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. in the shortcut menu. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and click Save View. review the existing floor plans. use the ViewCube. select Make Plan View. and click Rename. right-click {3D}. right-click Level 1. To orient the 3D view to another view. duplicate. right-click the view name. and elevations. and. right-click the ViewCube. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 31 Rename the 3D View. right-click the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. expand 3D Views. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. By default. If you want to modify view properties. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. or delete this view. If it does not display. ceiling plans. 22 In the Project Browser. a face. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click Orient to View. duplicate. review the floor plans. enter a view name. 24 On the Options Bar. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. and select the desired direction. Rename. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . 23 To add more levels to the template. click Schedule/Quantities. or an edge of the ViewCube. in the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. Black level heads have no associated views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 30 In the Project Browser. on the View toolbar. click 29 In the Project Browser.

If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. assign filters. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. and click Add View to Sheet. Select a view. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet.You can add schedules to a template. select the category type. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and click OK. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. select one. Right-click the sheet name. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. 37 Click OK.txt for MicroStation). To later add a title block to a sheet. modify settings as needed. select the title block and delete it. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. After the sheet is created. click Sheet. modify settings as needed. modify settings as needed. and click OK. select the default title block. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click Add View. 40 To add views to the sheet. and modify their properties accordingly. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. select and order required fields. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. in the Project Browser. on the View tab of the Design Bar. or exportlayersdgn. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. On the Filter tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. On the Formatting tab. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. To do so. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 42 Create new sheets as needed. expand Sheets (all).txt for AutoCAD. You can still add views to the sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. On the Appearance tab. and click Rename. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. You are prompted to select a title block.

you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Using shared parameters. and they become the set mappings for the project. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. click Save As. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. for example. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. select Save As. For example. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. When scheduling. When you create a multi-category schedule. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . and click Save. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save these mappings to a text file. 9 Click Save As. project parameters. and so on. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. 8 In the dialog. windows. therefore. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. They cannot be shared with other projects. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. name the file. These settings are retained within the project template. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. doors. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. 2 For each category. 5 For each category. and click Save. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.

and click OK. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and choose a shared parameter. select a parameter discipline type. 21 Under Categories. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 25 Click Select. For each parameter group. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 22 Click OK. 26 Click OK. 3 Name and save the file. add required parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 14 Click Add. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. project parameters. 9 Name the parameter. you can create a list of parameters. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 2 Click Create. and specify its discipline and type. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 17 Under Discipline. select a parameter value type. 11 For each parameter group. If a file already exists. 5 Enter the group name. select a group to add parameters to. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. click New. If this template will be used by multiple team members. click New. 10 Click OK. enter a parameter name. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. for Name. 19 Under Group parameter under. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 8 Under Parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. click Add. select Project parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. because each office has a unique set of needs. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 16 Under Parameter Data. and select Shared Parameter. 23 Add project parameters as needed. you may want to save the file to a network location.

27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. select Multi-Category. click OK. 35 For Name. 28 Click OK. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and make it your default template file. and click OK. enter a name for the schedule. 37 When you have completed the schedule. By creating named settings within the template. The tag is now part of the template. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 Under Printer. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. 6 In the New dialog. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. and the percent of actual size. you can load them into the template. 32 Navigate to the directory. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. you can set options such as sheet sizes. paper placement. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. For each printer. 4 Modify the printer settings. select the tag. By going first to the Print command. you create named print settings. In this exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. save the file as a template. 5 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. for Name. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . For information on creating multi-category tags. you need only select a setting. and click Open. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. click Setup. 3 Under Settings. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. Click OK. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. and print. or refer to the online help. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 34 For Category. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. make minor modifications if necessary.

you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. select it. click Setup. 11 Click Close when finished. 14 Under Save as type. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 15 Name the template. and click Open. select Template Files (*. click Browse. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 24 Navigate to the template location. 18 Click Browse. You can also set this template as your default template. click Save as. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. If you need to share this file with others. 22 Click the File Locations tab. In addition. you ensure that office standards are maintained. save it in a network location. select a different printer. In this lesson. 23 For Default template file. and click Save. The only remaining task is to save it. 9 In the Print dialog. and create new settings for this printer. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. modify the printer settings. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 20 Click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. enter a new name for the printer. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. Your template is complete. and click Open. In addition. Create additional settings as needed. loaded components. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. you modified settings. By investing the time to individualize your template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 25 Click OK. If you have a project. 19 Select the template.rte). and saved them to a template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .